13 .uno%3AClosePreview 48 Náhľad stránky ukončíte kliknutím na tlačidlo Zatvoriť náhľad.
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 39 Zobrazí náhľad strany pre tlač alebo zavrie náhľad.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TLB_TREELISTBOX 1d Vyberte databázu a tabuľku.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_INDIVIDUAL 39 Kliknutím vytvoríte jeden dokument pre každý záznam.
33 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_GENERATE_FROM_DATABASE 35 Vygeneruje názov súboru podľa údajov v databáze.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FROM 37 Určuje, ktoré záznamy budú zahrnuté do formuláru.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ALB_COLUMN 66 Použije obsah vybraného databázového poľa ako meno súboru, do ktorého bude formulár uložený.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3AED_PATH 3c Určuje cestu, kam sa budú ukladať jednotlivé formuláre.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_TO 3e Určuje číslo posledného záznamu, ktorý bude vytlačený.
22 SW_LISTBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_LB_FILTER 18 Vyberte formát súboru.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_MARKED 8a Spracuje iba označené záznamy v databáze. Voľba je dostupná iba v prípade, že ste predtým vybrali potrebné záznamy v databáze.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_SINGLE_DOC 56 Kliknutím vytvoríte jeden veľký dokument, ktorý bude obsahovať všetky záznamy.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ACB_SINGLE_JOBS 3d Vytlačí každý formulár zvlášť na vybranej tlačiarni.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_ALL 26 Spracuje všetky záznamy z databázy.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_PRINTER 15 Vytlačí formuláre.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_FROM 3a Určuje číslo prvého záznamu, ktorý bude vytlačený.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FILE 1f Uloží formuláre do súborov.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3APB_PATH 1e Otvorí dialóg Vybrať cestu.
1f .uno%3ASendOutlineToStarImpress 57 Použije osnovu aktívneho dokumentu a vytvorí podľa nej nový dokument prezentácie.
1d .uno%3ASendOutlineToClipboard 57 Skopíruje osnovu aktívneho dokumentu do schránky vo formáte Rich Text Format (RTF).
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT%3ANF_PARA 82 Zadajte maximum počtu po sobe nasledujúcich odsekov, ktoré budú skopírované do abstraktu za každým kopírovaným nadpisom.
15 .uno%3ACreateAbstract b0 Vytvorí z nadpisov a určitého počtu nasledujúcich odsekov v aktívnom dokumente abstrakt ich skopírovaním. Abstrakt je vhodný pre orientáciu v rozsiahlych dokumentoch.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT%3ANF_LEVEL 55 Zadajte rozsah nadpisov, ktoré chcete skopírovať do nového dokumentu (abstraktu).
20 .uno%3ASendAbstractToStarImpress 93 Otvorte aktuálny dokument ako prezentáciu $[officename] Impress. Aktuálny dokument musí obsahovať aspoň jeden preddefinovaný štýl nadpisu.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 64 Vyberte štýl nadpisu, ktorý chcete použiť ako určujúci pre vytvorenie ďalšej stránky HTML.
11 .uno%3ANewHtmlDoc de Uloží súbor ako HTML dokument, takže je možné si ho prehliadať pomocou internetového prehliadača. Môžete zvoliť, aby sa vždy, keď sa v dokumente vyskytne vybraný štýl nadpisu, vytvorila oddelená stránka.
22 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 64 Vyberte štýl nadpisu, ktorý chcete použiť ako určujúci pre vytvorenie ďalšej stránky HTML.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 64 Vyberte štýl nadpisu, ktorý chcete použiť ako určujúci pre vytvorenie ďalšej stránky HTML.
27 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL de Uloží súbor ako HTML dokument, takže je možné si ho prehliadať pomocou internetového prehliadača. Môžete zvoliť, aby sa vždy, keď sa v dokumente vyskytne vybraný štýl nadpisu, vytvorila oddelená stránka.
10 .uno%3ANavigator 114 Zobrazí alebo schová Navigátor, kde je možné rýchlo prechádzať medzi jednotlivými časťami dokumentu. Navigátor možno tiež použiť na vkladanie častí z aktuálneho alebo iných otvorených dokumentov. S jeho pomocou možno tiež organizovať hlavné dokumenty.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_HYP ab Vytvorí hypertextový odkaz na položku, ktorú pretiahnete do aktuálneho dokumentu. Kliknite na odkaz v dokumente, ak chcete prejsť na položku, na ktorú odkaz mieri.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX9 10c Kliknite sem, ak chcete na aktuálnu pozíciu nastaviť pripomienku, môžete ich nastaviť až päť. Na pripomienku prejdite kliknutím na ikonku Navigácia a potom v okne Navigácia kliknite na ikonku Pripomienka a potom na tlačidlo Predchádzajúca alebo Ďalšia
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX13 6e Kliknite na túto ikonku a potom vyberte počet úrovní nadpisov, ktoré chcete zobraziť v okne Navigátora.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX16 42 Zadajte číslo strany, na ktorú chcete prejsť a stlačte Enter.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX11 34 Presunie kurzor do päty alebo z päty do dokumentu.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_OUTLINES 88 Kliknite na 1 pre zobrazenie iba nadpisov najvyššej úrovne v Navigátore, kliknite na 10 pre zobrazenie všetkých úrovní nadpisov.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX7 2b Zobrazí alebo skryje zoznam v Navigátore.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX4 a7 Nastavuje možnosti preťahovania položiek z Navigátora do dokumentu, napr. ako hypertextový odkaz. Kliknite na túto ikonku a potom vyberte požadovanú možnosť.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX8 56 Prepína medzi zobrazením vybranej kategórie a všetkých kategórií v Navigátore.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX5 bf Presunie vybraný nadpis a zodpovedajúci text v Navigátore i v dokumentu o jednu pozíciu vyššie. Ak chcete presunúť iba nadpis bez textu, podržte Ctrl a potom kliknite na túto ikonu.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX24 f5 Otvorte panel nástrojov Navigácia formulárom, kde môžete ľahko prechádzať na nasledujúcu alebo predchádzajúcu položku v kategórii, ktorú vyberiete. Vyberte kategóriu a potom kliknite na šípku "Predchádzajúca" alebo "Ďalšia".
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX3 94 Preskočí na nasledujúcu položku v dokumente. Typ položky určíte pomocou kliknutia na ikonu Navigácia a potom na kategóriu, napr. "Grafika".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX12 49 Prehľadáva medzi textom poznámky pod čiarou a jej ukotvením v texte.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX6 bf Presunie vybraný nadpis a zodpovedajúci text v Navigátore i v dokumente o jednu pozíciu nižšie. Ak chcete presunúť iba nadpis bez textu, podržte Ctrl a potom kliknite na túto ikonu.
18 SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_LISTBOX d4 Ponúka zoznam všetkých otvorených dokumentov. Ak chcete zobraziť obsah určitého dokumentu v okne Navigátore, vyberte ho v zozname. Dokument zobrazený v Navigátore je v zoznamu označený ako "aktívny".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX14 be Zvýši úroveň osnovy vybraného nadpisu a jemu podriadených nadpisov o jednu. Ak chcete zvýšiť úroveň osnovy iba u vybraného nadpisu, podržte Ctrl a potom kliknite na túto ikonu.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_COPY a2 Vloží kópiu vybranej položky na miesto, kam ju pretiahnete do aktuálneho dokumentu. Nie je možné takto kopírovať grafiku, OLE objekty, odkazy a registre.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX2 91 Preskočí na predchádzajúcu položku v dokumente. Typ položky určíte kliknutím na ikonu Navigácia a potom na kategóriu, napr. "Grafika".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX10 3c Presunie kurzor do hlavičky alebo z hlavičky do dokumentu.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX15 be Zníži úroveň osnovy vybraného nadpisu a jemu podriadených nadpisov o jednu. Ak chcete znížiť úroveň osnovy iba u vybraného nadpisu, podržte Ctrl a potom kliknite na túto ikonu.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_LINK 164 Vloží vybranú položku ako odkaz tam, kde ju v aktuálnom dokumente pustíte. Text je vložený ako chránená sekcia, ktorej obsah je automaticky aktualizovaný, ak sa zmení zdrojový text. Ručne sa dá text aktualizovať pomocou voľby Nástroje - Aktualizovať - Odkazy. Nie je možné vytvárať odkazy pre grafiku, OLE objekty, odkazy a registre.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX17 5b Prepína medzi hlavným pohľadom a normálnym pohľadom, ak je otvorený hlavný dokument.
1e SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA_ERROR 47 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať zlé vzorce v tabuľkách.
18 SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA 42 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať vzorce v tabuľkách.
e SW_HID_NID_FRM 3d Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať textové rámce.
e SW_HID_NID_GRF 36 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať obrázky.
f SW_HID_NID_MARK 39 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať pripomienky.
e SW_HID_NID_REG 34 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať sekcie.
e SW_HID_NAVI_VS 138 Kliknite na túto ikonku. Budú zobrazené typy objektov, medzi ktorými je možné prechádzať. Potom kliknite na šípky "Predchádzajúci objekt" alebo "Nasledujúci objekt". Mená tlačidiel napovedia, ktorý objekt bol vybraný pre prechádzanie. Textový kurzor bude umiestnený na objekt vybraného typu.
e SW_HID_NID_DRW 34 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať kresby.
14 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEDOWN 4e Ak chcete prejsť na ďalšiu stranu alebo objekt, kliknite na tlačidlo dole.
e SW_HID_NID_TBL 36 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať tabuľky.
e SW_HID_NID_FTN 43 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať poznámky pod čiarou.
f SW_HID_NID_PREV 3b Nastaví kurzor na predchádzajúci objekt vybraného typu.
11 SW_HID_NID_POSTIT 2c Select this icon to browse through comments.
f SW_HID_NID_NEXT 33 Nastaví kurzor na ďalší objekt vybraného typu.
10 SW_HID_SCRL_NAVI b1 Ak kliknete na túto ikonku v Navigátore alebo v pravom dolnom rohu okna dokumentu, objaví sa panel nástrojov, kde môžete vyberať z existujúcich typov prvkov v dokumente.
f SW_HID_NID_OUTL 35 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať nadpisy.
e SW_HID_NID_SEL 35 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať výbery.
13 SW_HID_NID_SRCH_REP 41 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať výsledky hľadaní.
e SW_HID_NID_PGE 36 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať stránky.
f SW_HID_NID_CTRL 3e Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať ovládacie prvky.
e SW_HID_NID_OLE 39 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať OLE objekty.
12 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEUP 56 Ak chcete prejsť na predchádzajúcu stranu alebo objekt, kliknite na tlačidlo hore.
e SW_HID_NID_BKM 37 Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať záložky.
16 SW_HID_NID_INDEX_ENTRY 3f Vyberte túto ikonku, ak chcete prechádzať položky registra.
1b SW_HID_MD_COPY_TO_CLIPBOARD 33 Skopíruje vybraný automatický text do schránky.
16 SW_HID_GLOS_GROUP_TREE 70 Zobrazuje zoznam existujúcich kategórií Automatického textu a zodpovedajúcich ciest k súborom kategórií.
14 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_MACRO 6f Otvorí dialógové okno Priradiť makro, kde môžete pridať makro ku zvolenej položke Automatického textu.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_NET_REL 2e Odkazy na súbory na Internete sú relatívne.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_FILE_REL 4f Odkazy na priečinky automatického textu sú na vašom počítači relatívne.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_RENAME 7b Otvorí dialógové okno Premenovať automatický text, kde môžete zmeniť názov vybranej položky automatického textu.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3AED_SHORTNAME b7 Zobrazuje skratku označenej položky Automatického textu. Ak vytvárate novú položku Automatického textu napíšte do tohto poľa skratku akú chcete pre novú položku použiť.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3AED_NAME ed Zobrazuje názov označenej položky Automatického textu. Ak máte označený nejaký text v dokumente, napíšte do tohoto poľa názov novej položky Automatického textu, potom kliknite na tlačidlo Automatický text a zvoľte Nový.
f SW_HID_BIB_BASE 3f Pridá, premenuje alebo zmaže kategóriu automatického textu.
13 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_EDIT c5 Otvorí vybranú položku Automatického textu v oddelenom dokumente pre úpravy. Preveďte požadované zmeny, potom zvoľte Súbor - Uložiť Automatický text, a potom zvoľte Súbor - Zavrieť.
13 .uno%3AEditGlossary 119 Umožňuje vytvoriť, upraviť, alebo vložiť Automatický text. Ako automatický text môžete uložiť formátovaný text, text s grafikou, tabuľky a pole. Pre rýchle vloženie Automatického textu, napíšte začiatočné písmená Automatického textu a stlačte kláves F3.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_RENAME 55 Zmení meno vybranej kategórie Automatického textu na meno zadané do poľa Názov.
1a SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DEFINE_TEXT d1 Vytvorí novú položku Automatického textu iba z textu označeného v dokumente. Obrázky, tabuľky a ostatné objekty nebudú použité. Najskôr musíte zadať meno položky než sa zobrazí tento príkaz.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_IMPORT a6 Otvorte dialógové okno, kde môžete vybrať dokument alebo šablónu aplikácie Microsoft Word (97/2000/XP), obsahujúci Automatický text, ktorý chcete vložiť.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3ALB_PATH d4 Zobrazí cestu do adresára, kde sú uložené súbory vybranej kategórie Automatického textu. Ak vytvárate novú kategóriu Automatického textu, môžete zadať, kam chcete uložiť súbory tejto kategórie.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_INSERT_TIP 172 Zobrazuje návrhy dokončení slova ako nápovedný text po napísaní prvých troch písmen slova, ktoré sa zhodujú s niektorou položkou Automatického textu. Pre potvrdenie návrhu stlačte kláves Enter. Pokiaľ sa vami napísané znaky zhodujú s viac než jednou položkou Automatického textu, stlačte Ctrl+Tab pre prechádzanie medzi jednotlivými položkami.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3AED_NAME cd Zobrazuje názov vybranej kategórie Automatického textu. Pre zmenu názvu kategórie vpíšte nový názov a kliknite na Premenovať. Pre vytvorenie novej kategórie napíšte názov a kliknite na Nový.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_SHOW_EXAMPLE 42 Zapne alebo vypne náhľad vybranej položky Automatického textu.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_PATH 69 Otvorí dialóg Upraviť cesty, v ktorom je možné vybrať priečinok na uloženie automatického textu.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_BIB 52 Umožňuje pridať, premenovať alebo odstrániť kategóriu Automatického textu.
16 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_REPLACE 6b Nahradí obsah vybranej položky Automatického textu výberom prevedeným v aktuálne otvorenom dokumente.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_NEW 5c Vytvorí novú kategóriu Automatického textu s názvom, ktorý ste zadali do poľa Názov.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DEFINE f1 Vytvorí novú položku Automatického textu z označenia, ktoré ste previedli v dokumente. Položka bude pridaná do aktuálnej vybranej kategórie Automatického textu. Najskôr musíte zadať meno položky než sa zobrazí tento príkaz.
28 sw%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_EDIT af Kliknutím na toto tlačidlo zobrazíte ďalšie príkazy Automatického textu, ako napríklad vytvorenie novej položky Automatického textu z označeného textu v dokumente.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_NS 3a Priradí skratku k vybranej položke Automatického textu.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_NN 3f Vpíšte nové meno pre vybranú položku Automatického textu.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_OS 3a Priradí skratku k vybranej položke Automatického textu.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_ON 38 Zobrazuje názov vybranej položky Automatického textu.
1d .uno%3AAuthoritiesEntryDialog 33 Umožňuje upraviť položku použitej literatúry.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_NEXT 4a Prejde na nasledujúce pole rovnakého typu nachádzajúce sa v dokumente.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKNUMFORMAT a0 Tu vyberte formát obsahu poľa. Pre dátum, čas a používateľsky definované polia môžete zvoliť iný formát kliknutím na položku "Ďalšie formáty".
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_PREV 4e Prejde na predchádzajúce pole rovnakého typu nachádzajúce sa v dokumente.
12 .uno%3AFieldDialog 7a Otvorí dialógové okno, kde môžete upraviť vlastnosti poľa. Kliknite myšou pred pole a potom vyberte tento príkaz.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fprev 57 Prejde k predchádzajúcej značke poznámky pod čiarou alebo vysvetlivky v dokumente.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fnext 53 Prejde k nasledujúcej značke poznámky pod čiarou alebo vysvetlivky v dokumente.
13 .uno%3AEditFootnote a1 Umožňuje upraviť vybranú poznámku pod čiarou alebo vysvetlivku. Kliknite myšou pred poznámku pod čiarou alebo vysvetlivku a potom zvoľte tento príkaz.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fdelete 59 Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fprevious 43 Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ftypecb 3e Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2FIndexEntryDialog 66 Slúži k úprave položky registra. Kliknite pred alebo do položky registra a zvoľte tento príkaz.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ffirst 40 Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flast 3f Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document.
17 .uno%3AIndexEntryDialog 66 Slúži k úprave položky registra. Kliknite pred alebo do položky registra a zvoľte tento príkaz.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fnext 3f Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document.
12 SW_HID_REGION_TREE 58 Zadajte meno oblasti, ktorú chcete upraviť, alebo kliknite na meno v zozname oblastí.
2d sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_DISMISS 3c Odstráni vybranú oblasť a jej obsah vloží do dokumentu.
11 .uno%3AEditRegion 3c Mení vlastnosti oblastí definovaných vo vašom dokumente.
c .uno%3ARuler 9b Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page.
11 .uno%3AViewBounds 75 Zobrazuje alebo skrýva hranice oblasti stránky určené pre tlač. Čiary označujúce hranice nebudú vytlačené.
c .uno%3AMarks 98 Zobrazuje alebo skrýva tieňovania polí vo vašom dokumente vrátane nezalomiteľných medzier, vlastných pomlčiek, indexov a poznámok pod čiarou.
11 .uno%3AFieldnames 39 Striedavo prepína zobrazenie obsahu poľa a jeho názvu.
13 .uno%3AControlCodes 85 Zobrazuje vo vašom texte netlačiteľné riadiace znaky ako napríklad znaky konca odseku, zalomenie riadkov, tabulátory a medzery.
11 .uno%3ABrowseView 42 Zobrazí dokument tak, ako by bol vidieť vo webovom prehliadači.
12 .uno%3APrintLayout 3e Zobrazí dokument tak, ako bude vyzerať, keď ho vytlačíte.
1b .uno%3AShowHiddenParagraphs 25 Zobrazí alebo skryje skryté odseky.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagerb cc Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fstylelb 46 Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagenumsb 4a Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fcolumnrb ee Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2FBreakDialog 6c Vloží ručné zalomenie riadku, zalomenie stĺpca alebo zalomenie stránky na súčasnú pozíciu kurzora.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Flinerb 7e Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagenumcb c7 Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break.
12 .uno%3AInsertBreak 6c Vloží ručné zalomenie riadku, zalomenie stĺpca alebo zalomenie stránky na súčasnú pozíciu kurzora.
14 .uno%3AInsertSection 148 Vloží do dokumentu textovou sekciu na pozíciu kurzora. Môžete tiež vybrať blok textu a potom týmto príkazom vytvoriť sekciu. Sekcie môžete použiť pre vloženie blokov textu z iných dokumentov, pre aplikáciu vlastného rozloženia stĺpcov alebo k ochrane či skrytiu blokov textu pri splnení určitej podmienky.
2c sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_RNAME 1b Zadajte meno novej oblasti.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_CONDITION 42 Zadajte podmienku, ktorá musí byť pri skrytí oblasti splnená.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_DDE 78 Zadajte názov súboru (vrátane cesty), ktorý chcete vložiť, alebo súbor vyhľadajte po kliknutí na tlačidlo ....
2b sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_FILE 56 Vloží obsah iného dokumentu alebo oblasti z iného dokumentu do aktuálnej oblasti.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_PROTECT 3b Vo zvolených sekciách nebude dovolené prevádzať zmeny.
24 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_FILE 78 Zadajte názov súboru (vrátane cesty), ktorý chcete vložiť, alebo súbor vyhľadajte po kliknutí na tlačidlo ....
2a sw%3AComboBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ALB_SUBREG 5e Zo sekcií, ktoré sú v súbore k dispozícii, vyberte tú, ktorú chcete vložiť ako odkaz.
2e sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_PROTECT 3b Vo zvolených sekciách nebude dovolené prevádzať zmeny.
2c sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3APB_PASSWD 3b Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete zmeniť aktuálne heslo.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_FILE 78 Zadajte názov súboru (vrátane cesty), ktorý chcete vložiť, alebo súbor vyhľadajte po kliknutí na tlačidlo ....
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3APB_FILE 4d Vyberte súbor, ktorý chcete vložiť ako odkaz. Potom kliknite na Vložiť.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_DDE 78 Zadajte názov súboru (vrátane cesty), ktorý chcete vložiť, alebo súbor vyhľadajte po kliknutí na tlačidlo ....
2b sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_HIDE 39 Skryje zvolenú oblasť a zabráni, aby bola vytlačená.
2a sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3APB_FILE 4d Vyberte súbor, ktorý chcete vložiť ako odkaz. Potom kliknite na Vložiť.
2d sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ALB_SUBREG 5e Zo sekcií, ktoré sú v súbore k dispozícii, vyberte tú, ktorú chcete vložiť ako odkaz.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_FILE 56 Vloží obsah iného dokumentu alebo oblasti z iného dokumentu do aktuálnej oblasti.
26 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_RANAME 1b Zadajte meno novej oblasti.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_HIDE 39 Skryje zvolenú oblasť a zabráni, aby bola vytlačená.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3APB_PASSWD 3b Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete zmeniť aktuálne heslo.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_PASSWD 49 Chráni zvolené sekcie heslom. Heslo musí obsahovať najmenej 5 znakov.
29 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_CONDITION 42 Zadajte podmienku, ktorá musí byť pri skrytí oblasti splnená.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_SECTION_INDENTS%3AMF_AFTER 2e Udáva odsadenie za oblasťou pravého okraja.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_SECTION_INDENTS%3AMF_BEFORE 30 Udáva odsadenie pred oblasťou ľavého okraja.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Ffootnote 75 Vloží na pozíciu kurzora odkaz na poznámku pod čiarou a do spodnej časti stránky pridá poznámku pod čiarou.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fchoosecharacter 52 Pre ukotvenie poznámky pod čiarou alebo vysvetlivky sa vloží špeciálny znak.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fautomatic 57 Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert.
1b .uno%3AInsertFootnoteDialog 7a Vloží poznámku pod čiarou alebo poznámku na koniec. Kotva pre poznámku bude vložená na aktuálnu pozíciu kurzora.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fendnote 5a Vloží na pozíciu kurzoru odkaz na vysvetlivku a na koniec dokumentu pridá vysvetlivku.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fcharacter 5f Pre nastavenie znaku alebo symbolu pre aktuálnu poznámku pod čiarou vyberte túto možnosť.
14 .uno%3AInsertEndnote 7a Vloží poznámku pod čiarou alebo poznámku na koniec. Kotva pre poznámku bude vložená na aktuálnu pozíciu kurzora.
15 .uno%3AInsertFootnote 7a Vloží poznámku pod čiarou alebo poznámku na koniec. Kotva pre poznámku bude vložená na aktuálnu pozíciu kurzora.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fcharacterentry 5f Pre nastavenie znaku alebo symbolu pre aktuálnu poznámku pod čiarou vyberte túto možnosť.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2FInsertFootnoteDialog 7a Vloží poznámku pod čiarou alebo poznámku na koniec. Kotva pre poznámku bude vložená na aktuálnu pozíciu kurzora.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2Fbookmarks d3 Zadajte názov záložky, ktorú chcete vytvoriť. V dolnom zozname sú vypísané všetky záložky v aktuálnom dokumente. Ak chcete odstrániť záložku, vyberte ju v zoznamu a potom kliknite na Odstrániť.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2FInsertBookmarkDialog 72 Na pozíciu kurzora vloží záložku. Neskôr môžete pomocou Navigátora rýchle skočiť na označené miesto.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2Fdelete a3 Ak chcete odstrániť záložku, vyberte záložku v zozname v dialógu Vložiť záložku a kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť. Záložka sa zmaže bez potvrdenia.
15 .uno%3AInsertBookmark 72 Na pozíciu kurzora vloží záložku. Neskôr môžete pomocou Navigátora rýchle skočiť na označené miesto.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CAPTION%3AEDT_SEP 41 Zadajte znaky, ktoré sa zobrazia medzi číslom a textom popisu.
1a .uno%3AInsertCaptionDialog 62 Pridá číslovaný popis k vybranému obrázku, tabuľke, textovému rámcu alebo objektu kresby.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_FORMAT 3c Vyberte typ číslovania, ktoré chcete použiť pre popisy.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_CATEGORY e3 Vyberte kategóriu popisu alebo zadajte názov, ak chcete vytvoriť novú kategóriu. Názov kategórie sa zobrazí pred číslom popisu. Každá prednastavená kategória popisu sa formátuje pomocou štýlu rovnakého názvu.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_POS 67 Pridá popis nad alebo pod vybraný objekt. Táto možnosť je k dispozícii iba pre niektoré objekty.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABTN_AUTOCAPTION ba Otvorí dialóg Popis. Tento dialóg obsahuje rovnaké informácie ako dialóg, ktorý sa otvorí pri použití príkazu Nástroje - Možnosti -% Productname Writer - Automatický popis.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CAPTION%3AEDT_TEXT 38 Zadajte text, Ktorý sa má zobraziť po čísle popisu.
12 SW_HID_DLG_CAPTION 62 Pridá číslovaný popis k vybranému obrázku, tabuľke, textovému rámcu alebo objektu kresby.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ACB_APPLYBAS 37 Použije na rámček okolo popisu ohraničenie a tieň.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ALB_LEVEL 62 Vyberte počet úrovní osnovy od vrcholu hierarchie kapitol, ktoré sa majú zahrnúť do popisu.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 1d Špecifikuje znakový štýl.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3AED_SEPARATOR 4d Zadajte znak, ktorý sa má vložiť medzi číslo kapitoly a číslo popisu.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABTN_OPTION b8 Pridá do popisu číslo kapitoly. Ak chcete túto vlastnosť použiť, najskôr musíte priradiť úrovne osnovy štýlom odseku a potom použiť štýl na názvy kapitol v dokumente.
15 .uno%3AInsertEnvelope 14 Creates an envelope.
14 SW_HID_ENVELOP_PRINT 32 Vytvorí nový dokument a vloží do neho obálku.
15 SW_HID_ENVELOP_INSERT 3d Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ABOX_SEND 6a Pridá na obálku adresu odosielateľa. Zaškrtnite pole Odosielateľ a potom vyplňte spiatočnú adresu.
e SW_HID_ENV_ENV 70 Zadajte adresu príjemca a odosielateľa. Tiež môžete vložiť pole z databázy, napr. z databázy kontaktov.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_DATABASE 43 Vyberte databázu, ktorá obsahuje požadované údaje o adresách.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_SEND 6a Pridá na obálku adresu odosielateľa. Zaškrtnite pole Odosielateľ a potom vyplňte spiatočnú adresu.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_ADDR 19 Zadajte adresu príjemca.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_TABLE 42 Vyberte tabuľku, ktorá obsahuje požadované údaje o adresách.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ABTN_INSERT ba Vyberte databázové pole, ktoré obsahuje požadované údaje o adrese, a potom kliknite na tlačidlo šípky vľavo. Údaj sa vloží do adresného poľa, v ktorom sa nachádza kurzor.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_DBFIELD ba Vyberte databázové pole, ktoré obsahuje požadované údaje o adrese, a potom kliknite na tlačidlo šípky vľavo. Údaj sa vloží do adresného poľa, v ktorom sa nachádza kurzor.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SIZE_HEIGHT 18 Vložte výšku obálky.
2c sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABTN_ADDR_EDIT 58 Kliknite a vyberte štýl formátovania textu poľa príjemcu, ktoré chcete upravovať.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_ADDR_LEFT 57 Vložte, koľko miesta chcete nechať medzi ľavým okrajom obálky a poľom príjemca.
2c sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SEND_TOP 5b Vložte, koľko miesta chcete nechať medzi horným okrajom obálky a poľom odosielateľa.
2c sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_ADDR_TOP 59 Vložte, koľko miesta chcete ponechať medzi horným okrajom obálky a poľom príjemcu.
e SW_HID_ENV_FMT 22 Určuje vzhľad a rozmery obálky.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SIZE_WIDTH 18 Vložte šírku obálky.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SEND_LEFT 5b Vložte, koľko miesta chcete nechať medzi ľavým okrajom obálky a poľom odosielateľa.
2c sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABTN_SEND_EDIT 5c Kliknite a vyberte štýl formátovania textu poľa odosielateľa, ktorý chcete upravovať.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABOX_SIZE_FORMAT 85 Vyberte požadovanú veľkosť obálky, alebo vyberte "Používateľom definované" a zadajte šírku a výšku požadovanej obálky.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 7d Otvorí dialóg nastavenia tlačiarne, kde môžete nastaviť ďalšie možnosti tlače, napr. formát a orientáciu papiera.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3AFLD_DOWN 33 Vložte veľkosť posunutia tlačovej oblasti dole.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_BOTTOM 46 Obálka je v zásobníku tlačiarne založená tlačovou stranou dole.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_RGHT 46 Obálka je založená zvislo pri pravom okraji zásobníka tlačiarne.
e SW_HID_ENV_PRT 26 Nastavte možnosti tlače pre obálku.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_CNTR 3e Obálka je založená zvislo uprostred zásobníka tlačiarne.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_TOP 47 Obálka je v zásobníku tlačiarne založená tlačenou stranou nahor.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_LEFT 46 Obálka je založená zvislo pri ľavom okraji zásobníka tlačiarne.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_RGHT 49 Obálka je založená vodorovne pri pravom okraji zásobníka tlačiarne.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_LEFT 49 Obálka je založená vodorovne pri ľavom okraji zásobníka tlačiarne.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3AFLD_RIGHT 36 Vložte veľkosť posunutia tlačovej oblasti doprava.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_CNTR 41 Obálka je založená vodorovne do stredu zásobníka tlačiarne.
12 SW_HID_FIELD_CLOSE 18 Zavrie dialógové okno.
13 SW_HID_FIELD_INSERT 79 Vloží vybrané pole na pozíciu kurzora v dokumente. Ak chcete ukončiť tento dialóg, kliknite na tlačidlo Zavrieť.
12 .uno%3AInsertField 21 Vloží pole na pozíciu kurzora.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKFORMAT 83 Kliknite na formát, ktorý chcete použiť na vybrané pole, alebo kliknite na "Ďalšie formáty" a vytvorte si vlastný formát.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKDATEOFF 2b Vložte posun pre pole dátumu alebo času.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKLEVEL 4f Vyberte úroveň nadpisov kapitol, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do vybraného poľa.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKVALUE 4c Zadajte požadovaný posun číslovania pre pole čísla strany, napr. "+1".
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ACB_DOKFIXEDCONTENT 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKSELECTION 78 Vypíše možné polia pre vybraný typ poľa v zozname Typ. Ak chcete pole vložiť, vyberte ho a kliknite na vložiť.
e SW_HID_FLD_DOK 9d Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ pole, potom na pole v zozname Vybrať a potom kliknite na Vložiť.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKTYPE 9d Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ pole, potom na pole v zozname Vybrať a potom kliknite na Vložiť.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_REF%3AED_REFNAME 42 Zadajte názov používateľského poľa, ktoré chcete vytvoriť.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFFORMAT 41 Zvoľte formát, ktorý chcete použiť pre zvolené pole odkazu.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFSELECTION b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFTYPE 95 Zobrazuje dostupné typy polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, kliknite na pole v zozname Výber a kliknite na Vložiť.
1b SW_HID_REFSELECTION_TOOLTIP b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
1b .uno%3AInsertReferenceField ad Tu vkladáte do dokumentu odkazy alebo odkazované polia. Odkazy sú tvorené odkazovanými poľami v rámci rovnakého dokumentu alebo v poddokumentoch hlavného dokumentu.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_REF%3AED_REFVALUE 11 Upraviť hodnotu.
e SW_HID_FLD_REF ad Tu vkladáte do dokumentu odkazy alebo odkazované polia. Odkazy sú tvorené odkazovanými poľami v rámci rovnakého dokumentu alebo v poddokumentoch hlavného dokumentu.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_EDIT 54 Zobrazí dialóg Upraviť pole: Funkcia, v ktorej môžete upraviť Vstupný zoznam.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_LISTNAME 3b Zadajte jednoznačný názov pre pole typu Vstupný zoznam.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTREMOVE 27 Odstráni zvolenú položku zo zoznamu.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTADD 2b Pridá obsah políčka Položka do zoznamu.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ABT_FUNCMACRO 7d Otvorí dialóg Výber makra, v ktorom môžete zvoliť makro, ktoré bude spustené po kliknutí na vybrané pole dokumentu.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTUP 2d Posunie vybranú položku v zoznamu vyššie.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3ALB_LISTITEMS 4d Zvoľte položku, ktorú chcete v dokumente zobraziť a potom kliknite na OK.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_FUNCTYPE 9e Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, potom na pole v zozname Vybrať a potom kliknite na Vložiť.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCCOND2 b5 Text, ktorý má byť zobrazený pri splnení podmienky, zadajte do políčka Potom . Text, ktorý má byť zobrazený, pokiaľ podmienka splnená nie je, zadajte do políčka Inak.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_LISTITEM 17 Zadajte novú položku.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCVALUE 69 Nastaví dodatočné funkčné parametre poľa. Typ parametra závisí na typu poľa, ktorý si zvolíte.
f SW_HID_FLD_FUNC 69 Nastaví dodatočné funkčné parametre poľa. Typ parametra závisí na typu poľa, ktorý si zvolíte.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTDOWN 2d Posunie vybranú položku v zozname nižšie.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_NEXT 55 Zavrie aktuálny Vstupný zoznam a ak je k dispozícii nejaký ďalší, zobrazí ho.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_FUNCFORMAT 83 Kliknite na formát, ktorý chcete použiť na vybrané pole, alebo kliknite na "Ďalšie formáty" a vytvorte si vlastný formát.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCNAME 69 Nastaví dodatočné funkčné parametre poľa. Typ parametra závisí na typu poľa, ktorý si zvolíte.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_LISTITEMS 46 Vypíše položky. Najvrchnejša položka bude zobrazená v dokumente.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCCOND1 b5 Text, ktorý má byť zobrazený pri splnení podmienky, zadajte do políčka Potom . Text, ktorý má byť zobrazený, pokiaľ podmienka splnená nie je, zadajte do políčka Inak.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ALB_DOKINFFORMAT 83 Kliknite na formát, ktorý chcete použiť na vybrané pole, alebo kliknite na "Ďalšie formáty" a vytvorte si vlastný formát.
11 SW_HID_FLD_DOKINF 95 Zobrazuje dostupné typy polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, kliknite na pole v zozname Výber a kliknite na Vložiť.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ACB_DOKINFFIXEDCONTENT 5d Vloží pole ako statický obsah. To znamená, že takéto pole nemôže byť aktualizované.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ALB_DOKINFSELECTION 7f Zoznamy dostupných polí pre typ poľa vybraného zo zoznamu  Typ . Pre vloženie poľa kliknite na pole a potom na  Vložiť.
16 SW_HID_FIELD_DINF_TYPE 95 Zobrazuje dostupné typy polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, kliknite na pole v zozname Výber a kliknite na Vložiť.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARSEPARATOR 5d Zadajte znak, ktorý chcete použiť ako oddeľovač medzi úrovňami nadpisov alebo kapitol.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARCHAPTERLEVEL 64 Zvoľte úroveň nadpisu alebo kapitoly, ktorú chcete v dokumente začať číslovať od začiatku.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ACB_VARINVISIBLE 1f Skryje v dokumente obsah polí.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARNUMFORMAT 83 Kliknite na formát, ktorý chcete použiť na vybrané pole, alebo kliknite na "Ďalšie formáty" a vytvorte si vlastný formát.
e SW_HID_FLD_VAR a3 Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, potom na pole v zozname  Vybrať  a napokon kliknite na  Vložiť.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARNAME 42 Zadajte názov používateľského poľa, ktoré chcete vytvoriť.
14 SW_HID_FLDVAR_DELETE 8b Odstráni používateľom definované pole zo zoznamu. Odstrániť môžete iba tie polia, ktoré nie sú použité v aktuálnom dokumente.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARTYPE a3 Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, potom na pole v zozname  Vybrať  a napokon kliknite na  Vložiť.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARVALUE 43 Zadajte obsah, ktorý chcete vložiť do používateľského poľa.
13 SW_HID_FLDVAR_APPLY 3a Pridá do zoznamu Výber používateľom definované pole.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARFORMAT 52 V zozname Formát nastavte, či bude hodnota vložená ako text alebo ako číslo.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARSELECTION 78 Vypíše možné polia pre vybraný typ poľa v zozname Typ. Ak chcete pole vložiť, vyberte ho a kliknite na vložiť.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ARB_DBOWNFORMAT 33 Použije formát definovaný vo vybranej databáze.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ARB_DBFORMAT 55 Aplikuje formát, ktorý vyberiete v Zozname formátov definovaných používateľom.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DB%3AED_DBCONDITION 3a Pre polia spojené s podmienkou tu zadajte jej kritériá.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBNUMFORMAT 39 Vypíše dostupné, používateľom definované formáty.
d SW_HID_FLD_DB 9e Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, potom na pole v zozname Vybrať a potom kliknite na Vložiť.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3APB_ADDDB 9a Zobrazí dialóg na otvorenie súboru, v ktorom môžete zvoliť databázový súbor (*.odb). Zvolený súbor bude pridaný do zoznamu "Výber databázy".
17 SW_HID_DB_SELECTION_TLB 59 Vyberte databázovú tabuľku alebo databázový dotaz, na ktorý sa má pole odkazovať.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DB%3AED_DBSETNUMBER 52 Zadajte číslo záznamu, ktorý chcete vložiť,ak je zadaná podmienka splnená.
15 SW_HID_PRINT_AS_MERGE 127 Pokiaľ tlačíte dokument, ktorý obsahuje databázové pole, budete v dialógovom okne vyzvaný, či chcete vytlačiť formulárový dopis. Pokiaľ odpoviete "áno", bude zobrazený dialóg Hromadná korešpondencia, v ktorom môžete vybrať databázové záznamy, ktoré sa majú vytlačiť.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBTYPE 9e Zoznam všetkých dostupných polí. Ak chcete pridať pole do dokumentu, kliknite na typ poľa, potom na pole v zozname Vybrať a potom kliknite na Vložiť.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBFORMAT 39 Vypíše dostupné, používateľom definované formáty.
10 SW_HID_FLD_INPUT 59 Vloží textové pole, ktoré môžete otvoriť a upraviť kliknutím myší v dokumente.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_INPUT%3APB_NEXT 2f Preskočí na ďalšie vstupné pole dokumentu.
2c sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_FLD_INPUT%3AED_EDIT a3 Horné pole zobrazuje meno, ktoré bolo zadané v políčku Odkaz na záložke Funkcie v dialógu Pole. Dolné políčko zobrazuje obsah práve editovaného poľa.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fkey2cb c9 Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold".
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fphonetic0ed f9 Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fapplytoallcb 8f Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fsearchcasesensitivecb 30 Rozlišuje medzi veľkými a malými písmenami.
19 .uno%3AInsertIndexesEntry 38 Označí vybraný text ako položku indexu alebo obsahu.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2FIndexEntryDialog 38 Označí vybraný text ako položku indexu alebo obsahu.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_NEW_USER_IDX%3AED_NAME 75 Zadajte meno pre nový používateľom definovaný register. Register bude pridaný do zoznamu dostupných registrov.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Finsert 22 Marks an index entry in your text.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fsearchcasewordonlycb 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flevelnf c9 Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ftypecb 33 Select the index that you want to add the entry to.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fnew 53 Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fmainentrycb 40 Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fkey1cb b2 Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold".
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fentryed a6 Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed.
17 .uno%3AInsertMultiIndex 2f Vloží register alebo obsah na miesto kurzoru.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_STD 52 Znovu nastaví formátovanie vybranej úrovne registra na "Vychádzajúci" štýl.
2c sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_ASSIGN 49 Sformátuje vybranú úroveň registra pomocou vybraného štýlu odseku.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ALB_PARALAY 57 Vyberte štýl odseku pre vybranú úroveň registra a kliknite na tlačidlo Priradiť.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_EDIT_STYLE 50 Otvorí dialóg Štýl odseku, kde je možné upraviť štýl vybraného odseku.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ALB_LEVEL 3b Vyberte úroveň registrov, ktorých formátovanie meníte.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_AREA 5a Vyberte, ak sa má register vytvoriť pre celý dokument alebo len pre aktuálnu kapitolu.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_TYPE 2d Vyberte typ registra, ktorý chcete vložiť.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_TOXMARKS 55 Obsahuje položky registra vložené pomocou Vložiť - Registre a obsahy - Položka.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMHEADINGS 76 Vytvorí register z úrovní osnovy, tzn. z odsekov formátovaných preddefinovanými štýlmi nadpisov (Nadpis 1-10).
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_ADDSTYLES ea Vloží text formátovaný odsekovými štýlmi vybranými v dialógu Priradiť štýly ako položky do registra. Ak chcete určiť, ktoré odsekové štýly použiť pre registrovanie, kliknite na tlačidlo Priradiť štýly napravo.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_READONLY 36 Prevents the contents of the index from being changed.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3AED_TITLE 25 Vložte nadpis pre vybraný register.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3APB_ADDSTYLES 80 Otvorí dialóg Priradiť štýly, kde môžete vybrať odsekové štýly, a nimi formátovaný text bude zaradený do registra.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ANF_LEVEL 45 Vložte počet úrovní nadpisov, ktoré budú zahrnutý do registru.
14 SW_HID_TP_TOX_SELECT 2d Vyberte typ registra, ktorý chcete vložiť.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_INITIALCAPS 42 Automatický prevedie prvé písmeno položky registra na veľké.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_USEFF 11b Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p".
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_USE_DASH e2 Nahradí zhodné položky registra odkazujúce na po sebe idúce stránky jedinou položkou a uvedie rozsah strán namiesto ich výpočtu.Napr. položky "Pohľad 10, Pohľad 11, Pohľad 12" budú skrátený na "Pohľad 10-12".
2d sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3AMB_AUTOMARK 35 Vybrať, vytvoriť alebo upraviť "párovaci súbor".
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMFILE 78 Automatický určí položky registra pomocou párovacieho súboru" - zoznamy slov, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do registra.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_KEYASENTRY 2a Vloží položku registra ako samostatnú.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_COLLECTSAME ab Nahradí rovnaké položky registra jednou a priradí im zodpovedajúce čísla stránok. Napríklad položky"Pohľad 10, Pohľad 43" budú zlúčené do "pohľad 10, 43".
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_SORTALG ad Vyberte číselne, ak chcete zoradiť čísla podľa ich hodnoty, napr. 1, 2, 12. Vyberte abecedne, ak chcete zoradiť čísla podľa jednotlivých číslic, napr. 1, 12, 2.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 3f Vyberte jazykové pravidla pre zoraďovanie položiek registra.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_CASESENSITIVE 8c Rozlišuje medzi veľkými a malými písmenami pri zhodných položiek. Pre ázijské jazyky sa uplatní zvláštne zachádzanie so znakmi.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_CAPTIONSEQUENCE 49 Vyberte kategórie popisov, ktoré chcete použiť ako položky registra.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ARB_FROMOBJECTNAMES 22 Vytvorí register z mien objektov.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_DISPLAYTYPE 45 Vyberte časť popisov, ktorú chcete použiť pre položky registra.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ARB_FROMCAPTIONS 2e Vytvorí položky registra z popisov objektov.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMGRAPHICS 2a Zahrnie do registra ilustráciu a grafiku.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMOLE 21 Zahrnie do  registra OLE objekty.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_LEVELFROMCHAPTER a5 Nastaví odsadenie položiek registra zodpovedajúce tabuľkám, ilustráciám, textu v rámcoch a OLE objektom podľa ich umiestnenia v hierarchii nadpisov kapitol.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMTABLES 1e Zahrnie do registrov tabuľky.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMFRAMES 24 Zahrnie do registra text v rámcoch.
12 SW_HID_OLE_CHECKLB 43 Vyberte typ objektov, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do tabuľky objektov.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_BRACKET 49 Vyberte zátvorky, ktoré chcete použiť pre odkazovanie na literatúru.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_SEQUENCE 2b Automaticky čísluje položky literatúry.
30 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES%3APB_RIGHT 45 Posuňte vybraný štýl odseku v registri o jednu úroveň nižšie.
2f sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES%3APB_LEFT 45 Posuňte vybraný štýl odseku v registri o jednu úroveň vyššie.
19 SW_HID_DLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES 40 Vytvorí položky registrov pomocou určitých štýlov odsekov.
13 SW_HID_TP_TOX_ENTRY ac Určite formát položiek registra či položiek zoznamu tabuliek. Vzhľad tejto záložky sa zmení podľa typu registru, ktorý ste vybral na záložke Register/Tabuľka.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_PAGENO 29 Vloží číslo strany výskytu položky.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ALL_LEVELS 38 Uplatní aktuálne nastavenia na všetky úrovne obsahu.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_TAB dd Vloží zarážku tabulátoru. Ak chcete pridať vodiace bodkovanie, vyberte znak v poli  Vyplniť znakom. Polohu zarážky môžeme nastaviť v poli Umiestnenie kroku tabulátora, alebo zaškrtnite pole Zarovnať vpravo.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_EDITSTYLE 42 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete upraviť vybraný štýl znaku.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_ENTRY_NO 7e Iba viditeľné, ak kliknete na tlačidlo E# v riadku štruktúra. Vyberte ukázať číslo kapitoly s alebo bez oddeľovača.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ENTRYNO 6d Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
13 SW_HID_TOKEN_WINDOW 23 Zobrazí zbytok riadku Štruktúra.
15 SW_HID_TOX_ENTRY_EDIT 23 Zobrazí zbytok riadku Štruktúra.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_RELTOSTYLE b8 Nastaví zarážku tabulátora vzhľadom k "odsadeniu zľava" určenom v štýle odseku v záložke Štýly. Inak je zarážka tabulátora nastavená vzhľadom k ľavému okraju textu.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_FILLCHAR 24 Vyberte vodiaci znak pre tabulátor.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 44 Určite štýl formátovania pre vybranú časť riadku Štruktúra.
17 SW_HID_TOX_ENTRY_BUTTON 23 Zobrazí zbytok riadku Štruktúra.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_AUTORIGHT 38 Zarovná zarážku tabulátora k pravému okraju strany.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ENTRY 1e Vloží text nadpisu kapitoly.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3AMF_TABPOS 4d Vložte vzdialenosť medzi ľavým okrajom stránky a zarážkou tabulátora.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_HYPERLINK 182 Vytvorí odkaz pre časť položky, ktorá je uzavretá medzi (LS) a (LE). V riadku Štruktúra kliknite na prázdne pole pred časť, pre ktorú chcete odkaz vytvoriť a kliknite na toto tlačidlo. Potom vyberte prázdne pole za časť, pre ktorú tvoríte odkaz, a opäť kliknete na toto tlačidlo. Všetky hypertextové odkazy musia byť jedinečné. Je k dispozícii len pre obsah.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_ALPHADELIM 55 Používa vychádzajúce znaky abecedy usporiadané do zoznamu ako hlavičky sekcií.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_CHAPTERENTRY 42 Vyberte informácie o kapitole, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do zoznamu
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_COMMASEPARATED 40 Usporiada zoznam položiek oddelených čiarkou na jeden riadok.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_MAIN_ENTRY_STYLE d4 Špecifikujte štýl formátovania pre hlavné položky v abecednom zozname. Pre konverziu zoznamu položiek do hlavnej položky, kliknite na zoznam polí v dokumente a potom vyberte Upraviť - Položka registra.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_CHAPTERINFO 7a Vloží informácie o kapitole ako je hlavička a číslo. Vyberte informácie, ktoré chcete zobraziť Položka kapitoly.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ANF_LEVEL_OL 5a Vložte najvyššiu úroveň tých objektov, ktoré sú zobrazené vo vygenerovanom obsahu
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN3 35 Zoradí položky literatúry zostupne podľa abecedy.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_DOCPOS 44 Zoradí položky literatúry podľa výskytov odkazov na ne v texte.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_AUTHINSERT 9c Pridá kód odkazu na vybranú položku literatúry do riadku Štruktúra. Vyberte položku zo zoznamu, kliknite na prázdne pole a potom na toto tlačidlo.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_AUTHFIELD 79 Ak chcete pridať položku do riadku Štruktúra, kliknite na prázdne pole v riadku Štruktúra, a kliknite na Vložiť.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_THIRDKEY a0 Vyberte položku, podľa ktorej chcete zoradiť literatúru. Táto možnosť je aktívna iba ak je vybraná možnosť Obsah v oddiely zoraďovať podľa plochy.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN1 35 Zoradí položky literatúry zostupne podľa abecedy.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_AUTHREMOVE 34 Odstráni vybraný kód odkazu z riadku Štruktúra.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP1 36 Zoradí položky literatúry vzostupne podľa abecedy.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTCONTENT 75 Zoradí položky literatúry podľa kľúčov pre riadenie, ktoré vyberiete, napr. podľa autora alebo roku vydania.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_FIRSTKEY a0 Vyberte položku, podľa ktorej chcete zoradiť literatúru. Táto možnosť je aktívna iba ak je vybraná možnosť Obsah v oddiely zoraďovať podľa plochy.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP3 36 Zoradí položky literatúry vzostupne podľa abecedy.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP2 36 Zoradí položky literatúry vzostupne podľa abecedy.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_SECONDKEY a0 Vyberte položku, podľa ktorej chcete zoradiť literatúru. Táto možnosť je aktívna iba ak je vybraná možnosť Obsah v oddiely zoraďovať podľa plochy.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN2 35 Zoradí položky literatúry zostupne podľa abecedy.
1d SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_INSTITUTION 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_YEAR 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SERIES 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_MONTH 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1c SW_HID_DLG_CREATE_AUTH_ENTRY 35 Zmeniť obsah položky zoznamu použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM3 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ANNOTE 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITION 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NUMBER 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM1 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_BOOKTITLE 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PAGES 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SCHOOL 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM2 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITOR 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NOTE 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM4 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_JOURNAL 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM5 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1e SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_HOWPUBLISHED 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ADDRESS 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1c SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_IDENTIFIER 7d Zobrazuje krátky názov položky literatúry. Nové meno tu môžete vložiť iba, ak vytvárate novú položku literatúry.
15 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_URL 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PUBLISHER 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ISBN 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHOR 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CHAPTER 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1f SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ORGANIZATIONS 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_VOLUME 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
20 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHORITY_TYPE 31 Vyberte zdroj pre položku použitej literatúry.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_TITLE 40 Tu vyberte požadované údaje pre zoznam použitej literatúry.
1a SW_HID_DLG_CREATE_AUTOMARK 53 Vytvorte alebo upravte zoznam slov, ktoré budú zaradené do abecedného registra.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Ffromdocument 5a Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Ffrombibliography 33 Inserts a reference from the bibliography database.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2FBibliographyEntryDialog 27 Vloží odkaz na použitú literatúru.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Finsert b2 Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fentrylb 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
1d .uno%3AInsertAuthoritiesEntry 27 Vloží odkaz na použitú literatúru.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fedit 5f Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fnew db Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fentryed 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
12 .uno%3AInsertFrame 61 Vloží rámec, ktorý ide použiť pre vytvorenie jedného či viacej stĺpcov textu a objektov.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 75 Nakreslí rámec ťahaním v dokumente. Kliknite na šípku vedľa ikony, ak chcete určiť počet stĺpcov v rámci.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frepeatheaderspin 3f Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frepeatcb 65 Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2FInsertTableDialog 92 Vloží do dokumentu tabuľku. Môžete tiež kliknúť na šípku, ťahaním určiť rozmer tabuľky a vložiť ju kliknutím na poslednú bunku.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frowspin 34 Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fcolspin 37 Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fbordercb 21 Adds a border to the table cells.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fautoformat 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fdontsplitcb 34 Prevents the table from spanning more than one page.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fnameedit 1b Enter a name for the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fheadercb 24 Includes a heading row in the table.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable 92 Vloží do dokumentu tabuľku. Môžete tiež kliknúť na šípku, ťahaním určiť rozmer tabuľky a vložiť ju kliknutím na poslednú bunku.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CHANGE_DB%3APB_ADDDB 8e Zobrazí dialóg Otvoriť súbor, kde môžete vybrať súbor s databázou (*.odb). Vybraný súbor sa pridá do zoznamu dostupných databáz.
20 sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_CHANGE_DB 21 Vypíše používané databázou.
1a .uno%3AChangeDatabaseField 2b Zmeniť zdroje dát pre aktuálny dokument.
10 .uno%3AInsertDoc 36 Vloží textový súbor na aktuálnu pozíciu kurzora.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fprevious 24 Skočiť na predchádzajúci skript.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Furl b7 Pridá odkaz na súbor skriptu. Kliknite na prepínač URL  a potom vložte odkaz do pola. Môžete tiež kliknúť na tlačidlo nájsť (...), nájsť súbor a kliknúť na Vložiť.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fnext 1c Skočiť na ďalší skript.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2FInsertScriptDialog 46 Na pozíciu kurzora vloží skript do HTML alebo textového dokumentu.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fbrowse 44 Nájdite skript, na ktorý chcete odkazovať a kliknite na Vložiť.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Ftextentry 2f Napíšte kód skriptu, ktorý chcete vložiť.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Furlentry b7 Pridá odkaz na súbor skriptu. Kliknite na prepínač URL  a potom vložte odkaz do pola. Môžete tiež kliknúť na tlačidlo nájsť (...), nájsť súbor a kliknúť na Vložiť.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Ftext 2f Napíšte kód skriptu, ktorý chcete vložiť.
13 .uno%3AInsertScript 46 Na pozíciu kurzora vloží skript do HTML alebo textového dokumentu.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fscripttype 2c Zadajte typ skriptu, ktorý chcete vložiť.
19 .uno%3AInsertGraphicRuler 2c Vloží vodorovnú čiaru na miesto kurzoru.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fhorizontalrule%2Frulers 80 Vyberte typ čiary, ktorú chcete vložiť a kliknite na OK. Typ "Prostá" vloží prázdny odsek s čiarou ako dolným okrajom.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fhorizontalrule%2FHorizontalRuleDialog 2c Vloží vodorovnú čiaru na miesto kurzoru.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageHeader 9f Pridá alebo odoberie hlavičku zo štýlu strany, ktorý vyberiete v podponuke. Hlavička je pridaná všetkým stranám, ktoré používajú vybraný štýl.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageFooter 97 Pridá alebo odoberie pätu zo štýlu strany, ktorý vyberiete v podponuke. Päta je pridaná všetkým stranám, ktoré používajú vybraný štýl.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_ORPHANS 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_BREAKPOSITION 27 Vyberte, kam chcete zalomenie vložiť.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_PAGENUM 8d Zadajte číslo stránky, ktoré sa priradí prvej stránke po zalomení. Pokiaľ chcete pokračovať v aktuálnom číslovaní, zvoľte "0".
3f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_HYPHENAFTER 57 Zadajte minimálny počet znakov, ktoré musia byť na začiatku riadku po spojovníku.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_PAGECOLL 6c Zaškrtnite toto pole a potom vyberte štýl stránky, ktorý chcete použiť pre prvú stranu po zalomení.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_KEEPTOGETHER 52 Pri zalomení stránky či stĺpca ponechá súčasný a nasledujúci odsek spolu.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_WIDOWS 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
40 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_HYPHENBEFORE 63 Zadajte minimálny počet znakov, ktoré majú zostať na konci riadku, kým sa vloží spojovník.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_ORPHANS 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_MAXHYPH 5d Zadajte maximálny počet po sebe idúcich riadkov, na ktorých môže byť rozdelené slovo.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_KEEPTOGETHER 88 Pri zalomení stránky či stĺpca sa odsek nerozdeľuje, ale celý sa posunie na nasledujúcu stránku alebo do nasledujúceho stĺpca.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_BREAKTYPE 2e Vyberte typ zalomenia, ktorý chcete vložiť.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_PAGEBREAK 4c Zaškrtnite toto pole a potom vyberte typ zalomenia, ktorý chcete použiť.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_PAGECOLL 51 Vyberte štýl formátovania, ktorý sa použije pre prvú stránku po zalomení.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_EXT 25 Nastavenie delenia slov a toku textu.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_HYPHEN 37 Automatický vkladá rozdeľovače na potrebné miesta.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_WIDOWS 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_DISTANCE 42 Zadajte vzdialenosť medzi iniciálkami a zvyškom textu v odseku.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_LINES 70 Zadajte počet riadkov, cez ktoré sa má iniciálka roztiahnuť. U kratších odsekov sa iniciálka nezobrazí.
f SW_HID_DROPCAPS 94 Prvé písmeno odseku sa zobrazí ako veľké písmeno cez niekoľko riadkov. Odsek musí mať aspoň toľko riadkov, koľko určíte v poli Riadky.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ABOX_TEMPLATE 44 Zvoľte štýl formátovania, ktorý chcete použiť pre iniciálky.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_DROPCAPS 36 Zadajte počet znakov, ktoré sa zmenia na iniciálky.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AEDT_TEXT 55 Zadajte text, ktorý chcete zobraziť ako iniciálky namiesto prvých písmen odseku.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ACB_WORD 68 Zobrazí prvé písmeno prvého slova odseku ako iniciálku a ostatné písmená slova veľkým písmom.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ACB_SWITCH 38 Pre označené odseky sa použije nastavenie iniciálok.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_NEW_START 3a Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NUMBER_NEW_START 5a Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
26 SW_LISTBOX_TP_NUMPARA_LB_OUTLINE_LEVEL 54 Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style.
34 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_RESTART_PARACOUNT 56 Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter.
2d sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_COUNT_PARA 35 Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_RESTART_PARA 37 Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering
2c sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NEW_START 30 Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ALB_NUMBER_STYLE 43 Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph.
e SW_HID_NUMPARA a7 Adds or removes outline level, numbering, or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list.
11 .uno%3APageDialog 8e Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background.
17 .uno%3APageColumnDialog 4e Určí počet a rozloženie stĺpcov pre štýl stránky, rámca alebo sekcie.
25 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_COLUMN%3ABTN_UP 18 Zobrazí stĺpec vpravo.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_HEIGHT 42 Zadajte dĺžku oddeľovacej čiary v percentách výšky stĺpca.
14 .uno%3AFormatColumns 4e Určí počet a rozloženie stĺpcov pre štýl stránky, rámca alebo sekcie.
13 SW_HID_TABLE_COLUMN 4e Určí počet a rozloženie stĺpcov pre štýl stránky, rámca alebo sekcie.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ACB_BALANCECOLS 80 Rozdelí text na viacstĺpcové sekcie. Text je rozdelený do stĺpcov rovnakej výšky. Výška sekcie sa nastaví automaticky.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ACB_AUTO_WIDTH 22 Vytvorí stĺpce rovnakej šírky.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_1 18 Zadajte šírku stĺpca.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_COLUMN%3ALB_APPLY_TO 41 Vyberte objekt, na ktorý chcete použiť stĺpcové rozvrhnutie.
27 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_COLUMN%3ABTN_DOWN 18 Zobrazí stĺpec vľavo.
16 SW_HID_COLUMN_VALUESET 56 Zadajte počet stĺpcov, ktoré chcete zobraziť na stránke, v rámci alebo v sekcii.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_2 18 Zadajte šírku stĺpca.
27 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_DIST1 3f Zadajte medzeru, ktorú chcete vynechať medzi dvoma stĺpcami.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_NUMBER 56 Zadajte počet stĺpcov, ktoré chcete zobraziť na stránke, v rámci alebo v sekcii.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_3 18 Zadajte šírku stĺpca.
d SW_HID_COLUMN 4e Určí počet a rozloženie stĺpcov pre štýl stránky, rámca alebo sekcie.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_POSITION 7a Vyberte zvislé zarovnanie oddeľovacej čiary. Táto voľba je k dispozícii len ak je  Výška  čiary menšia ako 100%.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_STYLE 71 Vyberte štýl formátovania pre čiaru oddeľujúcu stĺpce. Ak nechcete oddeľovacie čiaru, zvoľte "Žiadny".
27 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_DIST2 3f Zadajte medzeru, ktorú chcete vynechať medzi dvoma stĺpcami.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINEPOS 61 Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_DIST 72 Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEDIST 66 Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINETYPE 69 Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt".
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_MAXHEIGHT 2f Enter the maximum height for the footnote area.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT 57 Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height.
14 SW_HID_FOOTNOTE_PAGE 7a Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEWIDTH 4e Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT_PAGE 5b Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_AT_TXTEND aa Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ALB_END_NUMVIEW 2c Select the numbering style for the endnotes.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_END_PREFIX 46 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number
3b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AFLD_FTN_OFFSET 36 Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ALB_FTN_NUMVIEW 2d Select the numbering style for the footnotes.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_NUM_FMT 31 Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_AT_TXTEND 28 Adds endnotes at the end of the section.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_END_SUFFIX 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number.
3b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AFLD_END_OFFSET 35 Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_FTN_SUFFIX 42 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_NUM 3f Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_NUM_FMT 32 Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_FTN_PREFIX 48 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_NUM 3e Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3AMF_TEXTSIZE 5b Zadajte základnú veľkosť textu. Pri väčších hodnotách bude na riadku menej znakov.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_NOGRID 5e Pridá alebo odstráni v aktuálnom štýle stránky textovú mriežku pre riadky alebo znaky.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_PRINT 35 Určuje nastavenia tlače a farieb textovej mriežky.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3AMF_RUBYSIZE 27 Zadajte veľkosť písma pre Ruby text.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_DISPLAY 35 Určuje nastavenia tlače a farieb textovej mriežky.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ALB_COLOR 35 Určuje nastavenia tlače a farieb textovej mriežky.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_CHARSGRID 5e Pridá alebo odstráni v aktuálnom štýle stránky textovú mriežku pre riadky alebo znaky.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ANF_CHARSPERLINE 31 Zadajte maximálny počet znakov na jeden riadok.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ANF_LINESPERPAGE 2c Zadajte maximálny počet riadkov na stranu.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_LINESGRID 5e Pridá alebo odstráni v aktuálnom štýle stránky textovú mriežku pre riadky alebo znaky.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_RUBYBELOW 38 Zobrazuje Ruby text vľavo alebo pod základným textom.
14 .uno%3AGraphicDialog 4e Naformátuje veľkosť, umiestnenie a ďalšie vlastnosti vybraného obrázku.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_WIDTH 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_FOLLOW b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ADLB_VERTICAL 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_AUTOHEIGHT a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_ASCHAR 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_FOLLOWTEXTFLOW b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOCHAR 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_FIXEDRATIO 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_AUTOWIDTH a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_AS_CHAR 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_REL_HEIGHT 61 Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ADLB_HORIZONTAL 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_HORITO 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOPAGE 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_PARA 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
e SW_HID_FRM_STD 4e Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_VERTTO 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_REL_WIDTH 5f Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_AT_CHAR 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_VERT 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_KEEPRATIO 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_MIRROR 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_AT_VERT_POS 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ALB_VERT_RELATION 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_PAGE 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOPARA 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_HORI 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ALB_HORI_RELATION 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_WIDTH 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ABT_REALSIZE 47 Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_VERTBY 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_HORIMIRROR 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_HORIBY 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_AT_HORZ_POS 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_RIGHT 42 Text obteká objekt na pravej strane, ak je je tu dostatok miesta.
e .uno%3AWrapOff 76 Umiestni objekt na samostatný riadok. Text v dokumente sa zobrazuje nad a pod objektom, ale nie po stranách objektu.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_ANCHOR_ONLY 3d Po stlačení klávesy Enter začne nový odsek pod objektom.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_ONLYOUTSIDE 60 Text obteká iba okolo obrysu objektu, ale nie vo voľných oblastiach vo vnútri tvaru objektu.
35 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_THROUGH 1a Umiestni objekt pred text.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_IDEAL b1 Text automaticky obteká objekt zľava, sprava alebo zo všetkých strán. Ak je vzdialenosť medzi objektom a okrajom stránky menšia ako 2 cm, text po tejto strane neobteká.
f .uno%3AWrapMenu 2d Určuje, ako má text obtekať okolo objektu.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN 50 Vloženie veľkosti medzery, ktorú chcete medzi pravým rohom objektu a textom.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_OUTLINE 71 Text obteká okolo tvaru objektu. Táto možnosť nie je dostupná ak je vybrané obtekanie Cez alebo pre rámce.
36 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_PARALLEL 2c Text obteká objekt po všetkých stranách.
1d .uno%3AWrapThroughTransparent 63 Presunie vybraný objekt na pozadie. Táto voľba je dostupná len keď je vybraté obtekanie  Cez.
d .uno%3AWrapOn 2c Text obteká objekt po všetkých stranách.
f .uno%3ATextWrap 2d Určuje, ako má text obtekať okolo objektu.
12 .uno%3AWrapThrough 1a Umiestni objekt pred text.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 52 Vloženie veľkosti medzery, ktorú chcete medzi horným okrajom objektu a textom.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN 50 Vloženie veľkosti medzery, ktorú chcete medzi ľavým rohom objektu a textom.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_TRANSPARENT 63 Presunie vybraný objekt na pozadie. Táto voľba je dostupná len keď je vybraté obtekanie  Cez.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 52 Vloženie veľkosti medzery, ktorú chcete medzi dolným okrajom objektu a textom.
12 .uno%3AWrapContour 71 Text obteká okolo tvaru objektu. Táto možnosť nie je dostupná ak je vybrané obtekanie Cez alebo pre rámce.
15 .uno%3AWrapAnchorOnly 3d Po stlačení klávesy Enter začne nový odsek pod objektom.
30 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_NO_WRAP 76 Umiestni objekt na samostatný riadok. Text v dokumente sa zobrazuje nad a pod objektom, ale nie po stranách objektu.
32 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_LEFT 3f Text obteká objekt na ľavej strane, ak je tu dostatok miesta.
e SW_HID_FRM_EXT 2d Určuje, ako má text obtekať okolo objektu.
10 .uno%3AWrapIdeal b1 Text automaticky obteká objekt zľava, sprava alebo zo všetkých strán. Ak je vzdialenosť medzi objektom a okrajom stránky menšia ako 2 cm, text po tejto strane neobteká.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_SELECT 36 Zmenenie režimu výberu, aby ste mohli vybrať obrys.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLY 196 Kreslenie uzavretých obrysov zložených z úsečiek. Kliknite tam, kde chcete začať mnohouholník a ťahaním kreslite úsečku. Kliknite znovu kvôli definovaniu konca úsečky a pokračujte v klikaní na definovanie zvyšných úsečiek mnohouholníka. Dvakrát kliknite na ukončenie kreslenia mnohouholníka. Na obmedzenie uhlov mnohouholníka na 45 stupňov držte počas klikania stlačený Shift
17 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_PIPETTE c1 Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box.
15 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_APPLY 24 Použitie obrysu na vybraný objekt.
19 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_WORKPLACE 5b Odstránenie používateľského obrysu. Kliknite tu, a potom kliknite v oblasti náhľadu.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_UNDO 1a Vrátenie poslednej akcie.
29 svx%3AFloatingWindow%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR 74 Zmenenie obrysu vybraného objektu. $[officename] používa obrys pre určenie obtekania textu možnosti pre objekt.
14 .uno%3AContourDialog 74 Zmenenie obrysu vybraného objektu. $[officename] používa obrys pre určenie obtekania textu možnosti pre objekt.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_CIRCLE 39 Kreslenie oválneho obrysu ťahaním v náhľade objektu.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYEDIT 46 Umožnenie zmeny tvaru obrysu. Kliknite tu a ťahajte úchytky obrysu.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_GRAPHWND 1c Zobrazenie náhľadu obrysu.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYMOVE 30 Ťahaním úchytiek obrysu sa mení tvar obrysu.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYINSERT 7b Vloženie úchytky, ktorou sa pri jej ťahaní môže meniť tvar obrysu. Kliknite sem a potom kliknite na náhľad obrysu.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYDELETE 65 Odstránenie bodu z náhľadu obrysu. Kliknite sem, potom kliknite na bod, ktorý chcete odstrániť.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_RECT 88 Kreslenie obdĺžnikovej kontúry ťahaním v náhľade objektu. Na kreslenie štvorca držte stlačenú klávesu Shift počas ťahania.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR%3AMTF_TOLERANCE 97 Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage.
1b SVX_HID_CONTDLG_AUTOCONTOUR 47 Automatické kreslenie obrysu okolo objektu, ktorý môžete editovať.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_REDO 29 Obnovenie poslednej akcie Undo príkazom.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_RIGHT_PAGES 47 Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku vodorovne iba na nepárnych stranách.
24 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ACB_VERT 28 Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku zvisle.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_LEFT_PAGES 45 Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku vodorovne iba na párnych stranách.
15 .uno%3AFlipHorizontal 28 Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku zvisle.
e SW_HID_GRF_EXT 42 Nastavenie možností prevrátenia a odkazu pre vybraný obrázok.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3APB_BROWSE 55 Vyberte súbor s obrázkom, na ktorý chcete odkazovať a potom kliknite na Otvoriť.
23 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ACB_HOR 2b Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku vodorovne.
13 .uno%3AFlipVertical 2b Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku vodorovne.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3AED_CONNECT a0 Zobrazovanie cesty k odkazovanému obrázku. Na zmenenie odkazu kliknite na prehľadávacie tlačidlo (...) a potom vyberte súbor, na ktorý chcete odkazovať.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_ALL_PAGES 43 Prevrátenie vybraného obrázku vodorovne na všetkých stranách.
14 CUI_HID_MACRO_MACROS 72 Zoznam dostupných makier. Vyberte makro, ktoré chcete priradiť k vybranej udalosti, a potom kliknite Priradiť.
1e CUI_HID_MACRO_HEADERTABLISTBOX 2f Zoznam udalostí, ktoré môžu spustiť makro.
13 CUI_HID_MACRO_GROUP 41 Určenie makra, ktoré sa vykoná pri výskyte vybranej udalosti.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_CLIENT 47 Používanie obrázkovej mapy ktorú ste vytvorili pre vybraný objekt.
1f sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_URL%3AED_URL 36 Zadajte celú cestu k súboru, ktorý chcete otvoriť.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_URL%3AED_NAME 29 Vloženie názvu pre hypertextový odkaz.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_SERVER 2d Použitie obrázkovej mapy na strane servera.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FRM_URL%3APB_SEARCH 49 Určenie súboru, ktorý chcete otvoriť hypertextovým odkazom Otvoriť.
e SW_HID_FRM_URL 5b Určenie vlastností hypertextového odkazu pre vybraný obrázok, rámec alebo OLE objekt.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_FRAME 3b Určenie mena rámca, kde chcete otvoriť cieľový súbor.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_PREV f9 Zobrazovanie prvku (objekt, obrázok alebo rámec), ktorý je pred súčasným v postupnosti odkazov. Na pridanie alebo zmenu predchádzajúceho odkazu vyberte názov zo zoznamu. Ak spájate rámce, súčasný a cieľový rámec musí byť prázdny.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_SIZE 25 Zamknutie veľkosti vybraného prvku.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_TEXTFLOW b0 Určenie preferovaného druhu obtekania textu v rámci. Pre používanie predvoleného nastavenia obtekania textu vyberte Používajte nadradené nastavenia objektu zo zoznamu.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PRINT_FRAME 2d Zahŕňa vybraný prvok pri tlači dokumentu.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_FRAME 3b Zamknutie pozície vybraného prvku v aktuálnom dokumente.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_EDIT_IN_READONLY 63 Umožňuje upravovať obsah rámca v dokumente, ktorý je iba na čítanie (ochrana proti zápisu).
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_CONTENT 33 Zamedzovanie zmenám obsahov vo vybraných prvkoch.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3AED_NAME 25 Vloženie názvu pre vybraný objekt.
e SW_HID_FRM_ADD 40 Určenie vlastností pre vybraný objekt, obrázok alebo rámec.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3AED_ALT_NAME a0 Vloženie textu, ktorý sa zobrazí vo webovom prehliadači, keď je vybratý objekt nedostupný. Alternatívny text sa používa na pomoc ľuďom s handicapom.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_NEXT e6 Zobrazovanie prvku (objekt, obrázok alebo rámec), ktorý je za súčasným v postupnosti odkazov. Na pridanie alebo zmenu nasledujúceho odkazu vyberte názov zo zoznamu. Ak spájate rámce, cieľový rámec musí byť prázdny.
12 .uno%3AFrameDialog 6d Otvorenie dialógu, v ktorom môžete meniť vlastnosti vybraného objektu, napríklad jeho veľkosť a meno.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 73 Určenie vlastností vybranej tabuľky, napríklad názov, zarovnanie, rozostup, šírku stĺpca, okraje a pozadie.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FULL 45 Rozširovanie tabuľky vodorovne k ľavému a pravému okraju strany.
33 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_BOTTOM_DIST 4e Vloženie vzdialenosti medzi spodným okrajom tabuľky a textom pod tabuľkou.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_LEFT 3d Zarovnanie ľavého okraja tabuľky k ľavému okraju strany.
13 SW_HID_FORMAT_TABLE 49 Nastavenie veľkosti, pozície, rozostupu a zarovnania vybranej tabuľky.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ACB_REL_WIDTH 3d Zobrazenie šírky tabuľky ako v percentách šírky strany.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_RIGHT 3d Zarovnanie pravého okraja tabuľky k pravému okraju strany.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_RIGHT_DIST 6a Vloženie veľkosti vzdialenosti, ktorú chcete nechať medzi pravým okrajom stránky a okrajom tabuľky.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_WIDTH 1b Vloženie šírky tabuľky.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FREE 70 Horizontálne zarovnanie tabuľky na základe vložených hodnôt Vľavo a Vpravo v poli v časti Vzdialenosť .
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FROM_LEFT 66 Zarovnanie ľavého okraja tabuľky k vzoru, ktorý ste vložili v Ľavom poli v časti Vzdialenosť .
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_TOP_DIST 4e Vloženie vzdialenosti, medzi horným okrajom tabuľky a textom nad tabuľkou.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_LEFT_DIST 62 Vloženie veľkosti miesta, ktoré chcete nechať medzi ľavým okrajom strany a okrajom tabuľky.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_NAME 72 Zadanie interného názvu pre tabuľku. Tento názov môžte použiť na rýchle nájdenie tabuľky v Navigátore.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_CENTER 28 Vycentruje tabuľku vodorovne na strane.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3AED_SPACE 8f Zobrazenie veľkosti miesta, ktoré je dostupné pre úpravu šírky stĺpcov. Pre nastavenie šírky tabuľky kliknite na záložku Tabuľka .
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACB_MOD_TBL 3f Zachovanie súčasnej šírky tabuľky pri zmene šírky bunky.
2f sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_BTN_UP 3d Zobrazenie stĺpcov tabuľky na pravo od aktuálneho stĺpca.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_3 27 Vloženie požadovanej šírky stĺpca.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_1 27 Vloženie požadovanej šírky stĺpca.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_2 27 Vloženie požadovanej šírky stĺpca.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_4 27 Vloženie požadovanej šírky stĺpca.
31 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_BTN_DOWN 3d Zobrazenie stĺpcov tabuľky na ľavo od aktuálneho stĺpca.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_6 27 Vloženie požadovanej šírky stĺpca.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACB_PROP 41 Zmení šírku tabuľky v závislosti na zadanej šírke stĺpca.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_5 27 Vloženie požadovanej šírky stĺpca.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_SPLIT_ROW 3e Umožnenie zalomenia stránky alebo stĺpca v riadku tabuľky.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_PAGEBREAK 66 Vyberte toto zaškrtávacie políčko a potom vyberte typ zalomenia, ktorý chcete priradiť tabuľke.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_PAGECOLL 64 Použitie štýlu strany, ktorý ste určili pre prvú stranu, ktorá nasleduje po zalomenej strane.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_BREAKCOLUMN 49 Vloženie zalomenia stĺpca pred a po tabuľke na viac stĺpcovej strane.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 42 Vloženie počtu riadkov, ktoré majú byť zahrnuté v záhlaví.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_PAGECOLL 61 Vybratie štýlu strany, ktorý chcete aplikovať na prvú stranu, ktorá nasleduje po zalomení.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_PAGEBREAKAFTER 35 Vloženie zalomenia strany alebo stĺpca po tabuľke.
f .uno%3ARowSplit 3e Umožnenie zalomenia stránky alebo stĺpca v riadku tabuľky.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_HEADLINE 5d Opakovanie záhlavia tabuľky na novej strane, keď tabuľka presiahne viac ako jednu stranu.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_BREAKPAGE 2e Vloženie zalomenia strany pred a po tabuľke.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_PAGEBREAKBEFORE 38 Vloženie zalomenia strany alebo stĺpca pred tabuľkou.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_KEEP 47 Keď vložíte zalomenie, udrží tabuľku a nasledujúci odsek pokope.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 31 Select the orientation for the text in the cells.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_SPLIT 44 Umožnenie zalomenia stránky alebo stĺpca medzi riadkami tabuľky.
15 SW_HID_TABLE_TEXTFLOW 39 Nastavenie možností obtekania textu pred a po tabuľke.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ANF_PAGENUM 49 Vloženie čísla strany pre prvú stranu, ktorá nasleduje po zalomení.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_VERTORIENT 39 Určenie zvislého zarovnania textu pre bunky v tabuľke.
e .uno%3AProtect 31 Chráni obsah vybraných buniek pred jeho zmenou.
19 .uno%3AUnsetCellsReadOnly 41 Zruší ochranu pre všetky vybrané bunky v aktuálnej tabuľke.
13 .uno%3ASetRowHeight 2d Zmenenie výšky vybraného(ých) riadka(ov).
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROW_HEIGHT%3ACB_AUTOHEIGHT 3b Automaticky nastavuje výšku riadka podľa obsahov buniek.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROW_HEIGHT%3AED_HEIGHT 3d Vloženie výšky, ktorú chcete pre vybraný(é) riadok(ky).
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 3f Automatické nastavovanie výšky riadka podľa obsahov buniek.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 28 Vybratie riadka, ktorý obsahuje kurzor.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 30 Zmazanie vybraného(ých) riadka(ov) z tabuľky.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2Fwidth 39 Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).
15 .uno%3ASetColumnWidth 2e Zmenenie šírky vybraného(ých) stĺpca(ov).
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2FColumnWidthDialog 2e Zmenenie šírky vybraného(ých) stĺpca(ov).
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2Fcolumn 46 Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of.
1c .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidth 48 Automatické upravovanie šírky stĺpca k príslušnému obsahu buniek.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 29 Vybratie stĺpca, ktorý obsahuje kurzor.
19 .uno%3AInsertColumnDialog 1e Vloženie stĺpca do tabuľky.
16 .uno%3AInsertRowDialog 1d Vloženie riadku do tabuľky.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 32 Vymazanie vybraného(ých) stĺpca(ov) z tabuľky.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ARID_STYLECATALOG%3ABT_TOOL 32 Toto sú rôzne kategórie štýlov formátovania.
18 SW_HID_COND_COLL_TABLIST f5 Tu je možné vidieť $[officename] preddefinované kontexty, vrátane úrovní osnovy jedna až desať, úrovní číslovania/odrážok jedna až desať, tabuľky, obsahu tabuľky, sekcie, ohraničenia, poznámky pod čiarou, hlavičky a päty.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3ACB_CONDITION 4a Zaškrtnutie tohto políčka definuje nový štýl ako podmienený štýl.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3APB_REMOVE 51 Kliknite tu pre vymazanie aktuálneho kontextu priradeného k vybranému štýlu.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3APB_ASSIGN 55 Kliknete na Priradiť pre aplikovanie vybraného Štýlu odseku pre určený kontext.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3ALB_STYLE 69 Zoznam všetkých štýlov odseku, ktoré môžu byť priradené kontextu, je obsiahnutý v poli zoznamu.
10 .uno%3ACharStyle 2c Zobrazenie štýlov formátovania pre znaky.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN ad Aplikovanie vybraného štýlu pre objekt alebo text, ktorý ste vybrali v dokumente. Kliknite na túto ikonu a potom pretiahnite výber v dokumente pre aplikovanie štýlu.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT a2 Použitie okna Štýly a Formátovanie pre použitie, vytvorenie, úpravu, pridanie, vymazanie štýlu formátovania. Dvojkliknutím na výber sa aplikuje štýl.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE a5 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window.
10 .uno%3AListStyle 4a Zobrazenie štýlov formátovania pre číslované a odrážkové zoznamy.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 2b Zobrazuje štýly pre formátovanie odseku.
10 .uno%3APageStyle 2c Zobrazenie štýlu formátovania pre strany.
11 .uno%3AFrameStyle 2d Zobrazenie štýlov formátovania pre rámce.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 75 Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 62 Vytvorenie nového štýlu založeného na formátovaní aktuálneho odseku, strany alebo výberu.
16 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EXEC 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
17 .uno%3AOnlineAutoFormat 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fadd 23 Adds a new table style to the list.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fnumformatcb 37 Includes numbering formats in the selected table style.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fbordercb 33 Includes border styles in the selected table style.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Falignmentcb 38 Includes alignment settings in the selected table style.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Ffontcb 35 Includes font formatting in the selected table style.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fpatterncb 37 Includes background styles in the selected table style.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Frename 5b Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2FAutoFormatTableDialog 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
11 .uno%3AAutoFormat 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fformatlb 6d Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 21 Deletes the selected table style.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_OFADLG_PRCNT_SET%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN 61 Zadajte minimálnu dĺžku (v percentách šírky stránky) na spojenie jednoriadkových odsekov.
16 .uno%3AAutoFormatApply 72 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect            Options.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_ACCEPT 24 Prijať všetky zmeny formátovania.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_REJECT 27 Odmietnuť všetky zmeny formátovania.
1a SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EDIT_CHG 91 Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date.
1d .uno%3AAutoFormatRedlineApply a3 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialog, you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_MERGE_STYLE 5e Nahradí štýly v aktuálnom dokumente, ktoré majú rovnaký názov ako načítané štýly.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_PAGE_STYLE 4a Načíta štýly stránky z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_TEXT_STYLE 5b Načíta štýly odseku a znakové štýly z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
17 SW_HID_LTEMPL_NUMBERING 4e Načíta štýly číslovania z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
2d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_NUM_STYLE 4e Načíta štýly číslovania z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
29 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_REGION 73 Zoznam dostupných kategórií šablón. Kliknutím na kategóriu v zozname Šablóny môžete zobraziť jej obsah.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_TEXT 5b Načíta štýly odseku a znakové štýly z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_FRAME_STYLE 48 Načíta štýly rámca z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
13 SW_HID_LTEMPL_FRAME 48 Načíta štýly rámca z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
2f sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3APB_LOAD_FILE 4d Vyberte súbor, ktorý obsahuje požadované štýly, a kliknite na Otvoriť.
16 SW_HID_LTEMPL_OVERRIDE 5e Nahradí štýly v aktuálnom dokumente, ktoré majú rovnaký názov ako načítané štýly.
11 .uno%3ALoadStyles 5c Importuje štýly formátovania z iného dokumentu alebo šablóny do aktuálneho dokumentu.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_PAGE 4a Načíta štýly stránky z vybraného dokumentu do aktuálneho dokumentu.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_TEMPLATE 33 Zoznam dostupných šablón vo vybranej kategórii.
11 .uno%3ASplitTable 4c Na pozícii kurzoru rozdelí aktuálnu tabuľku na dve samostatné tabuľky.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcustomheadingapplystyle 77 Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fnoheading 30 Splits the table without copying the header row.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcustomheading 34 Inserts an additional blank row in the second table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcopyheading 52 Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2FSplitTableDialog 4c Na pozícii kurzoru rozdelí aktuálnu tabuľku na dve samostatné tabuľky.
11 .uno%3AMergeTable 7f Zlúči dve po sebe nasledujúce tabuľky do jednej. Tabuľky musia nasledovať priamo po sebe a nesmú byť oddelené odsekom.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fok 2d Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fdelete 3e Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fworded 3d Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fleft 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fright 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2FHyphenateDialog 47 Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fcontinue 48 Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 47 Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwordcount%2FWordCountDialog 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
16 .uno%3AWordCountDialog 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
13 SW_HID_OUTLINE_FORM 6a Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents.
1a SW_HID_NUM_OUTL_NUM_SAVEAS 8e Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document.
1a SW_HID_NUM_OUTL_NAMED_NUMS 5c Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
1d .uno%3AChapterNumberingDialog 51 Určuje formát čísla a hierarchiu číslovania kapitol v súčasnom dokumente.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_NUM_NAMES%3AED_FORM 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_NUM_NAMES%3ALB_FORM 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fstartat 47 Zadajte číslo, od ktorého chcete reštartovať číslovanie kapitol.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fnumbering 51 Vyberte štýl číslovania, ktorý chcete použiť pre zvolenú úroveň osnovy.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fcharstyle 23 Vyberte formát znaku číslovania.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fsuffix 3b Zadajte text, ktorý chcete zobraziť za číslom kapitoly.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Flevel 66 Kliknite na úroveň osnovy, ktorú chcete upraviť, a potom nastavte číslovanie pre túto úroveň.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fsublevelsnf 98 Vyberte počet úrovní osnovy, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do číslovania kapitoly. Napr. vyberte "3", ak chcete zobraziť tri úrovne číslovania: 1.1.1
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2FOutlineNumberingPage 66 Kliknite na úroveň osnovy, ktorú chcete upraviť, a potom nastavte číslovanie pre túto úroveň.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fstyle 47 Vyberte štýl odseku, ktorý chcete priradiť vybranej úrovni osnovy.
15 .uno%3AFootnoteDialog 46 Určuje nastavenie zobrazenia pre poznámky pod čiarou / vysvetlivky.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fpagestylelb 39 Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fprefix 59 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fparastylelb 31 Select the paragraph style for the footnote text.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fconted ca Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fsuffix 53 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcontfromed c7 Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fposdoccb 3a Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcharstylelb 5e Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcountinglb 2e Select the numbering option for the footnotes.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2FFootnotePage 34 Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Foffsetnf 8a Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcharanchorstylelb 67 Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fnumberinglb 4a Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fpospagecb 2d Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2FEndnotePage 26 Specifies the formatting for endnotes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fnumberinglb 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fcharanchorstylelb 66 Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fsuffix 52 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fcharstylelb 5c Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fpagestylelb 38 Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fprefix 58 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fparastylelb 30 Select the paragraph style for the endnote text.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Foffsetnf 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fsemicolons 45 Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fkeepcolumn 50 Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fothered 3b Type the character that you want to use as a column marker.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fautofmt 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fbordercb 2f Adds a border to the table and the table cells.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Frepeatheading 3b Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fheadingcb 34 Formats the first row of the new table as a heading.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Frepeatheaderssb 25 Repeats the first n rows as a header.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Ftabs 3a Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fdontsplitcb 27 Does not divide the table across pages.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fparagraph 40 Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2FConvertTextTableDialog 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fother 5d Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker.
17 .uno%3AConvertTableText 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2FSortDialog 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey1 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb2 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup1 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb2 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup2 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
11 .uno%3ASortDialog 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb3 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Flanglb 33 Select the language that defines the sorting rules.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb1 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb3 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey2 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdelimpb 6c Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey3 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
10 .uno%3ATableSort 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fseparator 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftabs 56 If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fmatchcase 7a Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolumns 45 Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup3 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown1 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Frows 65 Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown3 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown2 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb1 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcharacter 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
13 .uno%3ACalculateSel 47 Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard.
11 .uno%3ARepaginate 78 Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar.
14 .uno%3ARemoveTableOf 23 Deletes the current index or table.
13 .uno%3AEditCurIndex 21 Edits the current index or table.
15 .uno%3AUpdateCurIndex 1a Updates the current index.
17 .uno%3AUpdateAllIndexes 98 Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Frestarteverynewpage 40 Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fpositiondropdown 31 Select where you want the line numbers to appear.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fblanklines 2c Includes empty paragraphs in the line count.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fshownumbering 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fspacingspin 57 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2FLineNumberingDialog 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fstyledropdown 46 Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fformatdropdown 30 Select the numbering style that you want to use.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Ftextentry 33 Enter the text that you want to use as a separator.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Flinesspin 3a Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Flinesintextframes 9f Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document.
1a .uno%3ALineNumberingDialog 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fintervalspin 31 Enter the counting interval for the line numbers.
10 .uno%3AUpdateAll 64 Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateFields 3b Updates the contents of all fields in the current document.
15 .uno%3AUpdateAllLinks 2a Updates the links in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateCharts 26 Aktualizuje všetky grafy v dokumente.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 3e Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object.
12 .uno%3AMergeDialog 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
16 .uno%3AMailMergeWizard 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_NEWDOC 5f Vytvorí nový dokument aplikácie Writer, na ktorom sa založí hromadne rozosielaná správa.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3APB_LOADDOC 45 Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_RECENTDOC 46 Založí nový dokument hromadnej korešpondencie na už existujúcom.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_LOADDOC 62 Vyberte existujúci dokument programu Writer, na ktorom sa založí hromadne rozosielaná správa.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ALB_RECENTDOC 11 Vyberte dokument.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3APB_BROWSETEMPLATE 1b Otvorí dialóg  Šablóny.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_CURRENTDOC 61 Použije aktuálny dokument programu Writer, na ktorom sa založí hromadne rozosielaná správa.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_LOADTEMPLATE 4c Vyberte šablónu, na ktorej chcete založiť hromadne rozosielanú správu.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUTTYPE_PAGE%3ARB_MAIL 5c Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUTTYPE_PAGE%3ARB_LETTER 28 Creates a printable mail merge document.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ASSIGN 1e Opens the Match Fields dialog.
37 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE_CB_HIDE_EMPTY_PARA 2f Enable to leave empty lines out of the address.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3ACB_ADDRESS 31 Adds an address block to the mail merge document.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ADDRESSLIST 8d Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_SETTINGS 26 Opens the Select Address Block dialog.
2d SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_PB_ASSIGN 26 Otvorí dialóg  Priradiť polia ... .
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_PREVSET 79 Použite tlačidlá prehliadania pre náhľad dát z predchádzajúceho alebo nasledujúceho záznamu v databáze adries.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_NEXTSET 79 Použite tlačidlá prehliadania pre náhľad dát z predchádzajúceho alebo nasledujúceho záznamu v databáze adries.
31 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_CB_GREETINGLINE 12 Pridať oslovenie.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3APB_DOWN 1a Moves the salutation down.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_TOP 6a Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_LEFT 6c Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ACB_ALIGN 49 Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ALB_ZOOM 2c Select a magnification for the page preview.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_UP 18 Moves the salutation up.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 5a Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the main mail merge document for all recipients.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_NEXT 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3ACB_EXCLUDE 34 Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_LAST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIRST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3AED_RECORD 64 Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_PREV 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 3c Searches for whole words only and not parts of larger words.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3AED_FIND 68 Enter the text that you want to search for in the merged document, for example, the name of a recipient.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_BACKWARDS 45 Searches from the current cursor position to the top of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_MATCHCASE 47 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters in the search.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 59 Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the mail merge document for a single recipient.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIND 1a Click to start the search.
31 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVENOW 13 Uložiť dokumenty.
32 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTNOW 2f Vytlačiť dokumenty hromadnej korešpondencie.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDDOCUMENTS 33 Kliknite pre odoslanie správ elektronickej pošty.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDMAIL 46 Odošle výstup ako správy elektronickej pošty všetkým príjemcom.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDAS 98 Otvorí dialóg  Správa elektronickej pošty  kde zadáte text elektronickej pošty pre súbory hromadnej korešpondencie, ktoré sa pošlú prílohou.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVESTARTDOC 43 Uloží počiatočný dokument, ktorý obsahuje databázové polia.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_FROM 59 Vyberte rozsah od začiatku záznamu v poli  Od , až k poslednému záznamu v poli  Do .
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEINDIVIDUAL e0 Uloží dokument hromadnej korešpondencie tak, že pre každého príjemcu vytvorí vlastný súbor. Mená súborov sa odvodia z mena ktoré ste zadali, potom nasleduje podčiarkovník, a potom číslo aktuálneho záznamu.
39 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTERSETTINGS 1e Zmeňte vlastnosti tlačiarne.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_SENDAS 31 Vyberte formát pre správu elektronickej pošty.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_MAILTO 47 Vyberte pole databázy, ktoré obsahuje elektronickú adresu príjemcu.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDALL 4e Zvoľte, ak chcete odoslať správy elektronickej pošty všetkým príjemcom.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_COPYTO 5b Otvorí dialóg  Kopírovať do , kde môžete zadať jednu alebo viac adries CC alebo BCC.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEMERGEDDOC 36 Uloží spoločný dokument hromadnej korešpondencie.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINT 46 Vytlačiť výstup pre všetkých alebo len pre vybraných príjemcov.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_PRINT 14 Vyberte tlačiareň.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_SUBJECT 31 Zadajte predmet pre správu elektronickej pošty.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEASONE 3f Uloží dokument hromadnej korešpondencie do jedného súboru.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINTALL 2f Vytlačiť dokumenty pre všetkých príjemcov.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVESTARTDOC 20 Uložiť vygenerovaný dokument.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_ATTACHMENT 17 Zobrazí meno prílohy.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_TO 4e Zadajte číslo posledného záznamu, ktorý bude v hromadnej korešpondencii.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_FROM 55 Zadajte číslo prvého záznamu, ktorý bude vložený do hromadnej korešpondencie.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_COPYTO%3AED_BCC 4a Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_COPYTO%3AED_CC 44 Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_LEFT 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
3a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_RIGHT 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
40 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_REMOVEFIELD 29 Odstráni vybrané pole z iného zoznamu.
16 SW_HID_MM_CUSTOMFIELDS 34 Select a field and drag the field to the other list.
3b sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AED_DRAG 3d Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons.
37 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3ACB_FIELD 50 Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields.
37 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_UP 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_DOWN 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
40 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_INSERTFIELD 73 Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once.
2b SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_CB_GREETINGLINE 20 Adds a salutation to the e-mail.
29 SW_MULTILINEEDIT_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_MLE_BODY 22 Enter the main text of the e-mail.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3AED_COUNTRY 3a Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_ALWAYS 3e Includes country or regional information in the address block.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_NEVER 40 Excludes country or regional information from the address block.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_CUSTOMIZE 58 Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_DELETE 2a Deletes the selected address block layout.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_NEW 53 Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_DEPENDENT 86 Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box.
19 SW_HID_MM_ADDRESSLIST_TLB 46 Vyberte zdroj údajov, ktorý chcete použiť ako databázu kontaktov.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_CREATELIST 63 Otvorí dialóg  Nová databáza kontaktov , v ktorom môžete vytvoriť novú databázu kontaktov.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_LOADLIST 46 Vyberte zdroj údajov, ktorý chcete použiť ako databázu kontaktov.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_FILTER 5e Otvorí dialóg  Štandardný filter, kde môžete definovať filtre nad databázou kontaktov.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_EDIT 5c Otvorí dialóg  Nová databáza kontaktov , v ktorom môžete upraviť databázu kontaktov.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_TABLE 65 Otvorí dialóg  Vybrať tabuľku , kde môžete pre hromadnú korešpondenciu vybrať inú tabuľku.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG%3APB_PREVIEW 27 Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog.
26 SW_HID_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG_LISTBOX 3f Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses.
17 .uno%3ADefaultNumbering 39 Pridá alebo odstráni číslovanie označených odsekov.
12 .uno%3AChainFrames 29 Spojí označený rámec s iným rámcom.
13 .uno%3AUnhainFrames 1b Zruší prepojenie rámcov.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows 43 Vloží do tabuľky jeden či viac riadkov pod umiestnenie kurzoru.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns 43 Vloží do tabuľky jeden či viac stĺpcov za umiestnenie kurzoru.
13 .uno%3ATableModeFix 66 Ak je aktívny tento režim, zmeny riadkov alebo stĺpcov ovplyvnia iba susedné riadky alebo stĺpce.
17 .uno%3ATableModeFixProp 53 Ak je tento režim aktívny, zmeny riadkov alebo stĺpcov ovplyvnia celú tabuľku.
18 .uno%3ATableModeVariable 57 Ak je tento režim aktívny, zmeny riadkov alebo stĺpcov ovplyvnia veľkosť tabuľky.
e .uno%3AAutoSum 67 Prevedie súčet hodnôt. Poznámka: ukazovateľ musí byť v bunke, v ktorej sa má súčet zobraziť.
14 .uno%3ARemoveBullets 51 Vypne číslovanie alebo odrážky aktuálneho odseku alebo označených odsekov.
19 .uno%3ADecrementSubLevels 3e Presunie odseky vrátane podčastí o jednu úroveň nižšie.
19 .uno%3AIncrementSubLevels 4d Presunie odseky vrátane podčastí o jednu úroveň v číslovaní vyššie.
1d .uno%3AInsertNeutralParagraph 4f Vloží odsek bez číslovania. Existujúce číslovanie to nijako neovplyvní.
15 .uno%3AMoveUpSubItems 3e Presunie odsek vrátane podčastí nad predchádzajúci odsek.
17 .uno%3AMoveDownSubItems 3a Presunie odsek vrátane podčastí pod nasledujúci odsek.
15 .uno%3ANumberingStart 1f Reštartuje číslovanie textu.
16 .uno%3AStatePageNumber 124 V tomto poli stavového riadku sa zobrazuje číslo aktuálnej stránky. Dvojklikom otvoríte Navigátor, s jeho pomocou je možné ľahko prechádzať dokumentom.  Pravé kliknutie zobrazí všetky záložky v dokumente. Kliknutím na záložku sa ukazovateľ umiestni na pozíciu záložky.
14 .uno%3AStatusBarFunc 2d Zobrazuje informácie o aktuálnom dokumente.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 1f Priblíži pohľad na dokument.
10 .uno%3AZoomMinus 5f Oddiali pohľad na dokument a umožní tak zobraziť jeho väčšiu časť v zmenšenej mierke.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 5f Oddiali pohľad na dokument a umožní tak zobraziť jeho väčšiu časť v zmenšenej mierke.
14 SW_HID_PVIEW_ZOOM_LB 20 Určuje mierku náhľadu strany.
13 .uno%3AShowTwoPages 2d Zobrazí v okne Náhľad strany dve stránky.
12 .uno%3APreviewZoom ce Určuje počet stránok, ktoré sa v náhľade zobrazia. Kliknutím na šípku vedľa ikonky sa otvorí mriežka, s jej pomocou je možné vybrať počet riadkov a stĺpcov, v ktorých sa stránky zobrazia.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_ZOOM%3AED_COL 18 Určuje počet stĺpcov.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_ZOOM%3AED_ROW 17 Určuje počet riadkov.
18 .uno%3AShowMultiplePages ce Určuje počet stránok, ktoré sa v náhľade zobrazia. Kliknutím na šípku vedľa ikonky sa otvorí mriežka, s jej pomocou je možné vybrať počet riadkov a stĺpcov, v ktorých sa stránky zobrazia.
13 .uno%3AShowBookview 48 Ak je zvolené, zobrazí sa prvá stránka v náhľade na pravej strane.
3d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PORTRAIT 1e Vytlačí stránky na výšku.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_RMARGIN 20 Určuje šírku pravého okraja.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_HMARGIN 39 Určuje vodorovné vzdialenosti medzi stranami dokumentu.
1a .uno%3APreviewPrintOptions 4a Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné nastaviť možnosti tlače dokumentu.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_BMARGIN 20 Určuje šírku dolného okraja.
18 FN_PREVIEW_PRINT_OPTIONS 4a Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné nastaviť možnosti tlače dokumentu.
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_ROWS 3d Určuje počet riadkov (koľko strán sa zobrazí nad sebou).
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_COLS 40 Určuje počet stĺpcov (koľko strán sa zobrazí vedľa seba).
3e sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 1e Vytlačí stránky na šírku.
3c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3APB_STANDARD 8b Určuje, že systém nebude používať pevný počet riadkov a stĺpcov pri tlači náhľadu, ale použije hodnoty zobrazené v náhľade.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_LMARGIN 20 Určuje šírku ľavého okraja.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_TMARGIN 20 Určuje šírku horného okraja.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_VMARGIN 36 Určuje zvislé vzdialenosti medzi stranami dokumentu.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_AND 2d Overí hodnoty podľa booleovskej funkcie AND
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SIN 27 Vypočíta sínus zadaný v radiánoch.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NOT 2e Overí hodnoty podľa booleovskej funkcie  NOT
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SQRT 1c Vypočíta druhú odmocninu.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GEQ 40 Overuje, či je hodnota väčšia alebo rovná určenej hodnote.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MAX 38 Vypočíta najväčšiu hodnotu z oblasti alebo zoznamu.
16 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LISTSEP 1a Oddeľuje prvky v zozname.
11 SW_HID_MN_POP_OPS 2e Do vzorca môžete vkladať rôzne operátory.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NEQ 25 Overuje nerovnosť zadaných hodnôt.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GRE 37 Overuje, či je hodnota väčšia ako určená hodnota.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LES 35 Testuje, či je hodnota menšia ako určená hodnota.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_PHD 13 Vypočíta percento
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_TAN 30 Vypočíta tangens hodnoty zadanej v radiánoch.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MEAN 4b Vypočíta aritmetickú strednú hodnotu z hodnôt v oblasti alebo zoznamu.
12 SW_HID_MN_POP_FUNC 3d Máte na výber z nasledujúcich trigonometrických funkcií:
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LEQ 3e Overuje, či je hodnota menšia alebo rovná určenej hodnote.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ASIN 34 Vypočíta arkussínus hodnoty zadanej v radiánoch.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ACOS 26 Vypočíta arkuskosínus v radiánoch.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SUM 25 Vypočíta súčet vybraných buniek.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MIN 37 Vypočíta najnižšiu hodnotu z oblasti alebo zoznamu.
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_OR 2d Overí hodnoty pomocou booleovskej funkcie OR
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_XOR 2e Overí hodnoty pomocou booleovskej funkcie XOR
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_EQ 29 Overuje, či sa zadané hodnoty rovnajú.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_COS 31 Vypočíta kosínus hodnoty zadanej v radiánoch.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_POW 1b Vypočíta mocninu čísla.
17 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CALC 49 Otvorí podmenu, z ktorého je možné do bunky tabuľky vložiť vzorec.
14 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ROUND 39 Zaokrúhli číslo na určený počet desatinných miest.
18 SW_HID_MN_POP_STATISTICS 3a Máte na výber z nasledujúcich štatistických funkcií:
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ATAN 35 Vypočíta arkustangens hodnoty zadanej v radiánoch.
19 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CANCEL 36 Zruší obsah vstupného riadku a zavrie panel vzorca.
18 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_APPLY 91 Presunie obsah vstupného riadka do dokumentu a zavrie panel vzorca. Obsah vstupného riadku sa vloží na pozíciu aktuálnej bunky v dokumente.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_FORMULA 8a Umožňuje vytvoriť vzorec priamym zadaním do vstupného riadka alebo pomocou podmenu, ktoré sa zobrazí po kliknutí na ikonku Vzorec.
12 SW_HID_INSERT_CTRL 6f Tento panel nástrojov obsahuje rôzne funkcie na vkladanie rámcov, obrázkov, tabuliek a ďalších objektov.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl 6f Tento panel nástrojov obsahuje rôzne funkcie na vkladanie rámcov, obrázkov, tabuliek a ďalších objektov.
16 .uno%3AInsertFieldCtrl 56 Kliknutím otvorte dialóg Polia. Kliknutím na šípku vedľa ikonky otvorte podmenu.
15 HID_INSERT_FIELD_CTRL 56 Kliknutím otvorte dialóg Polia. Kliknutím na šípku vedľa ikonky otvorte podmenu.
16 .uno%3AInsertDateField 22 Vloží aktuálny dátum ako pole.
16 .uno%3AInsertTimeField 20 Vloží aktuálny čas ako pole.
1c .uno%3AInsertPageNumberField 46 Vloží na pozíciu ukazovateľa číslo aktuálnej stránky ako pole.
1b .uno%3AInsertPageCountField 35 Vloží do dokumentu celkový počet strán ako pole.
17 .uno%3AInsertTopicField 3d Vloží ako pole predmet určený vo vlastnostiach dokumentu.
17 .uno%3AInsertTitleField 3c Vloží ako pole nadpis určený vo vlastnostiach dokumentu.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 37 Vloží ako pole meno osoby, ktorá vytvorila dokument.
e .uno%3AGraphic 75 Ak je ikona Obrázky zap/vyp na paneli Nástroje aktívna, nezobrazujú sa žiadne obrázky, ale len prázdne rámce.
13 .uno%3AShadowCursor 28 Aktivuje alebo deaktivuje priamy kurzor.
15 .uno%3AStateWordCount b2 The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 73 Tieto príkazy umožňujú prácu s aktuálnym dokumentom, otvorenie nového dokumentu alebo ukončenie aplikácie.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 44 Toto Menu obsahuje príkazy na úpravu obsahu aktuálneho dokumentu.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 4b Toto menu obsahuje príkazy ovládajúce zobrazenie dokumentu na obrazovke.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu c9 Menu Vložiť obsahuje príkazy na vkladanie nových prvkov do dokumentu. To zahrňuje okrem iného sekcie, poznámky pod čiarou, komentáre, zvláštne znaky, obrázky a objekty z iných aplikácií.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 4a Obsahuje príkazy na formátovanie rozloženia a obsahu vášho dokumentu.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu ae Obsahuje nástroje na kontrolu pravopisu, galériu obrázkov, ktoré môžete pridať do svojho dokumentu a nástroje na prispôsobenie menu a nastavenia predvolieb programu.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 41 Obsahuje príkazy na manipuláciu a zobrazovanie okien dokumentu.
19 .uno%3AConvertTableToText 52 Otvorí dialógové okno, v ktorom môžete previesť aktuálnu tabuľku do textu.
19 .uno%3AConvertTextToTable 4b Otvorí dialógové okno, kde môžete zmeniť vyznačený text do tabuľky
10 .uno%3ATableMenu 56 Zobrazuje príkazy na vloženie, úpravu a odstránenie tabuľky v textovom dokumente.
18 .uno%3AHeadingRowsRepeat 72 Opakovanie hlavičky tabuľky na ďalších stranách, pokiaľ má tabuľka rozsah jednej alebo viacerých strán.
12 .uno%3ADeleteTable 1a Zmaže aktuálnu tabuľku.
12 .uno%3ASelectTable 1b Vyberie aktuálnu tabuľku.
11 .uno%3AEntireCell 19 Označí aktuálnu bunku.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 51 Text formátovaný v jazyku s komplexným rozložením sa zadáva sprava doľava.
10 HID_TEXT_TOOLBOX 3f Panel na formátovanie obsahuje funkcie na formátovanie textu.
d .uno%3AShrink 2d Zmenší veľkosť písma označeného textu.
b .uno%3AGrow 2f Zväčší veľkosť písma označeného textu.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 1f Text sa zadáva zľava doprava.
12 HID_GRAFIK_TOOLBOX 63 Panel Obrázok obsahuje funkcie na formátovanie a rozmiestnenie vybraných bitmapových obrázkov.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX 75 Panel Tabuľka obsahuje funkcie, potrebné pre prácu s tabuľkou. Objaví sa, pokiaľ umiestnite kurzor do tabuľky.
10 HID_DRAW_TOOLBOX 121 Panel Vlastnosti objektu kresby je k dispozícii vo Writeri a Calcu. Zvoľte Zobraziť - Nástroje - Vlastnosti objektu kresby. Ovládacie prvky sú dostupné, keď je vybraný objekt kresby. Vo východzom nastavení sa niektoré ikony pre textové dokumenty a tabuľkové zošity líšia.
f HID_NUM_TOOLBOX a3 Panel Odrážky a číslovanie obsahuje funkcie na úpravu štruktúry očíslovaných odsekov vrátane zmien poradia odsekov a určenia rôznych úrovní odsekov.
11 .uno%3AZoomSlider 9e Keď posuniete ovládač Lupy vľavo, zobrazí sa viac stránok. Keď ho posuniete vpravo, obsah stránky sa zväčší a zobrazí sa menšia časť stránky.
15 .uno%3ALanguageStatus 170 Zobrazuje jazyk označeného textu. Kliknutím otvorte ponuku, z ktorej môžete vybrať jazyk označeného textu alebo aktuálneho odseku. Voľba [žiadny] vyradí text z kontroly pravopisu a delenia slov. Voľba Nastaviť na východzí jazyk nastaví označený text nebo odsek na predvolené nastavenie jazyka. Voľba Viac otvorí dialóg s ďalšími možnosťami.
11 .uno%3AViewLayout a1 Ikony zobrazenia zľava doprava: Samostatná strana. Režim zobrazenia viacerých stránok vedľa seba. Režim knihy, kde sa zobrazujú dve stránky vedľa seba.
14 .uno%3AInsertFormula 50 Panel Vzorec umožňuje vytvárať a vkladať do textového dokumentu výpočty.
11 HID_FRAME_TOOLBOX 86 Keď je rámec vybraný, zobrazí sa panel Rámec, ktorý poskytuje najdôležitejší funkcie na jeho formátovanie a umiestňovanie.
f HID_OLE_TOOLBOX 87 Panel OLE objekt  sa zobrazuje ak je objekt vybraný. Obsahuje najdôležitejšie funkcie na formátovanie a rozmiestňovanie objektov.
15 HID_DRAW_TEXT_TOOLBOX 49 Obsahuje príkazy na formátovanie textu, ktorý je obsiahnutý v kresbe.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
2c starmath%3APushButton%3ARID_SYMBOLDIALOG%3A2 43 Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 50 Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
2c sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_COPY%3ABTN_SET_DEFAULT 50 Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATCOL f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 40 Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_PRINTAREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
2e sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ARB_ASSIGN f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELABBREV 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
2e sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATROW f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD 50 Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_FORMULACELL f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
3b sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_CRITERIA_AREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN 97 Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
43 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DEST_AREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELDOUBLECAPS 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DEL 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_VARCELL f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ARB_DBAREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 53 Kliknutím na Zrušiť zavriete okno bez uloženia akýchkoľvek vykonaných zmien.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_DATA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DATA_AREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_AREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 f9 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV 63 View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 35 Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 46 Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 28 Enables a selected object to be renamed.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copies the selected element to the clipboard.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 39 Updates the view in the window or in the selected object.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY 99 Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a security query appears before objects are deleted.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 50 By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 53 Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 4f Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents.
13 .uno%3AHelperDialog 9d Allows you to activate the automatic Help Agent. You can also activate the Help Agent through $[officename] - General - Help Agent in the Options dialog box.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftiffpreviewcb 6a Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 79 Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 32 Specifies that you do not wish to use compression.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 62 Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fbinarycb 52 Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fheightmf-nospin 15 Specifies the height.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 66 LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel1rb 8c Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2.
2e svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf-nospin 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 24 Exports the file in grayscale tones.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel2rb 73 Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Finterlacedcb 40 Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fepsipreviewcb b6 Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 41 Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 36 Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics.
29 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf-nospin 20 Specifies the measurement units.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 1a Exports the file in color.
2d svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fsavetransparencycb ba Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftextcb 57 Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthlb 14 Specifies the width.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 41 Select the character set from the options used for import/export.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 41 Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 2b Exports all data fields with a fixed width.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 44 Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 2c Specifies the character set for text export.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CHARSET 3c Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_ASONCE 3e Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_QUOTED_AS_TEXT b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
29 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_TYPE1 5f Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_COMMA 30 Separates data delimited by commas into columns.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CUSTOMLANG 2f Determines how the number strings are imported.
2c sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_TEXTSEP 5c Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SPACE 30 Separates data delimited by spaces into columns.
2d sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_FIXED 45 Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns.
2f sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ANF_AT_ROW 35 Specifies the row where you want to start the import.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_OTHER 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
3a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_DETECT_SPECIAL_NUMBER 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_SEPARATED 27 Select the separator used in your data.
29 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_TAB 2e Separates data delimited by tabs into columns.
22 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII 2b Sets the import options for delimited data.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SEMICOLON 34 Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns.
26 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3AED_OTHER 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 64 The Warning Print Options dialog appears when the page setup does not match the defined print range.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT 72 Specifies that anything extending beyond the maximum print range will be cut off and not included in the printing.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_LF 2d Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_LANGUAGE 78 Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_FONT 93 By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CRLF 4a Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_CHARSET 3d Specifies the character set of the file for export or import.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CR 34 Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 27 Inserts the selected graphic as a link.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 49 Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 30 Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 42 Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 2d Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 32 The Preview command displays the selected graphic.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 32 Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 64 If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 36 Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 30 Allows you to save the background of a Web page.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 38 Opens a dialog where you can save the selected graphics.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 1b Disables inserted plug-ins.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2b Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 1f Displays the name of the theme.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 26 Vytvorí nový dokument $[officename].
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 37 Vytvorí nový tabuľkový zošit ($[officename] Calc).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 5a Vytvorí novú prezentáciu ($[officename] Impress). Zobrazí sa Sprievodca prezentáciou.
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 1d Vytvorí nový HTML dokument.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 84 Otvorí dialóg Vizitky, kde je možné upraviť nastavenia pre vizitky a následne vytvoriť nový dokument ($[officename] Writer).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 8f Otvorí dialóg Štítky, kde je možné upraviť nastavenia pre štítky a následne vytvoriť nový textový dokument ($[officename] Writer).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 20 Vytvorí nový hlavný dokument.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 1f Vytvorí nový XForms dokument.
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 38 Vytvorí nový textový dokument ($[officename] Writer).
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 3c Otvorí Sprievodcu databázou na vytvorenie novej databázy.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 2b Vytvorí novú kresbu ($[officename] Draw).
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 5c Vytvorí nový $[officename] dokument. Typ dokumentu môžete zmeniť kliknutím na šípku.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 3c Otvorí Sprievodcu databázou na vytvorenie novej databázy.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 51 Ak chcete vytvoriť dokument zo šablóny, vyberte Nový - Šablóny a dokumenty.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 2b Vytvorí nový vzorec ($[officename] Math).
b slot%3A5500 4f Vytvorí nový dokument s použitím šablóny alebo otvorí vzorový dokument.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 37 Zobrazí vlastnosti vybranej šablóny alebo dokumentu.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 42 Povoľuje pozrieť si náhľad vybranej šablóny alebo dokumentu.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 2c Vytlačí vybranú šablónu alebo dokument.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 45 Presunie sa do priečinku o jednu úroveň vyššie, ak je dostupný.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW da Zoznam všetkých dostupných šablón alebo dokumentov pre vybranú kategóriu. Vyberte šablónu alebo dokument a potom kliknite na Otvoriť. Pre náhľad dokumentu kliknite na tlačidlo Náhľad nad pravou časťou.
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 26 Otvorí vybranú šablónu na úpravu.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL a6 Kategórie sa zobrazujú v ľavej časti dialógu  Šablóny a Dokumenty. Po kliknutí na kategóriu sa v časti Nadpis zobrazia súbory spojené s touto kategóriou.
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 45 Pridá, odstráni alebo usporiada šablóny alebo vzorové dokumenty.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 32 Presun späť na predchádzajúce okno v dialógu.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 51 Povoľuje vám vytvárať štítky. Štítky sa vytvárajú v textovom dokumente.
13 SW_HID_LABEL_INSERT 23 Creates a new document for editing.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_TYPE f0 Vyberte formát rozmerov, ktoré chcete použiť. Dostupné formáty závisia od značky vybranej v zozname Značka. Ak chcete použiť vlastný formát štítkov, vyberte [Požívateľský] a potom kliknite na formát na záložke Formát.
2d sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3AEDT_WRITING 5f Zadajte text, ktorý sa má zobraziť na štítku. Tiež je možné vložiť databázové pole.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_ADDR 5f Vytvorí štítok s vašou spätnou adresou. Text, ktorý je v poli Text štítku sa prepíše.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DATABASE 4c Vyberte databázu, ktorú chcete použiť ako zdroj dát pre vaše štítky.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_MAKE 30 Vyberte značku papiera, ktorú chcete použiť.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DBFIELD 7b Vyberte pole databázy, ktoré chcete a kliknite na šípku vľavo od tohoto poľa. Takto vložíte pole do Textu štítku.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_SHEET 26 Tlačí štítky na jednotlivé listy.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_CONT 24 Tlačí štítky na spojitý papier.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_INSERT 7b Vyberte pole databázy, ktoré chcete a kliknite na šípku vľavo od tohoto poľa. Takto vložíte pole do Textu štítku.
e SW_HID_LAB_LAB 32 Zadajte text štítku a vyberte veľkosť papiera.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_TABLE 65 Vyberte databázovú tabuľku obsahujúcu pole (polia), ktorú chcete použiť na vašich štítkoch.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_LEFT ad Zobrazí vzdialenosť medzi ľavým okrajom stránky a ľavým okrajom prvého štítku alebo vizitky. Pokiaľ nastavujete vlastný formát, na tomto mieste zadajte hodnotu.
28 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3ACB_MAKE 2b Zadajte alebo vyberte požadovanú značku.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3APB_SAVE 33 Uloží aktuálny formát štítkov alebo vizitiek.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_WIDTH 6f Zobrazí šírku štítku alebo vizitky. Pokiaľ nastavujete vlastný formát, zadajte na tomto mieste hodnotu.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3AED_TYPE 24 Zadajte alebo vyberte druh štítku.
e SW_HID_LAB_FMT 19 Nastaví formát papiera.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_UPPER ad Zobrazí vzdialenosť medzi horným okrajom stránky a horným okrajom prvého štítku alebo vizitky. Pokiaľ nastavujete vlastný formát, na tomto mieste zadajte hodnotu.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_VDIST b3 Vzdialenosť medzi horným okrajom štítku alebo vizitky a horným okrajom štítku alebo vizitky pod ním. Pokiaľ nastavujete vlastný formát, zadajte na tomto mieste hodnotu.
2a sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HEIGHT 6f Zobrazí šírku štítku alebo vizitky. Pokiaľ nastavujete vlastný formát, zadajte na tomto mieste hodnotu.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_COLUMNS 4e Zadajte počet štítkov alebo vizitiek, ktoré budú vedľa seba na stránke.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HDIST 90 Vzdialenosť medzi ľavými okrajmi susediacich štítkov alebo vizitiek. Pokiaľ nastavujete vlastný formát, zadajte na tomto mieste hodnotu.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_ROWS 4c Zadajte počet štítkov alebo vizitiek, ktoré budú na stránke pod sebou.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_COL 58 Zadajte počet štítkov alebo vizitiek, ktoré chcete mať na stránke v jednom riadku.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_ROW 50 Zadajte počet riadkov štítkov alebo vizitiek, ktoré chcete mať na stránke.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_SINGLE 33 Vytlačí jeden štítok alebo vizitku na stránku.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ACB_SYNCHRON a1 Umožňuje vám upraviť jeden štítok alebo vizitku a po kliknutí na tlačidlo Synchronizovať obsahy aktualizovať obsah všetkých štítkov alebo vizitiek.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC 6d Skopíruje obsah ľavého horného štítku alebo vizitky do ostatných štítkov alebo vizitiek na stránke.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PAGE 31 Vytvorí celú stránku štítkov alebo vizitiek.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 26 Otvorí dialóg Nastavenie tlačiarne.
e SW_HID_LAB_PRT 69 Ďalšie možnosti nastavení štítkov alebo vizitiek, napr. synchronizácia textu a voľby tlačiarne .
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 2d Umožní vám navrhnúť a vytvoriť vizitky.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 26 Vytlačí vizitky na súvislý papier.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 27 Vytlačí vizitky na jednotlivé listy.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE ec Vyberte formát rozmerov, ktorý chcete použiť. Dostupné formáty závisia na značke vybranej v zozname Značka. Ak chcete použiť vlastný formát štítku, vyberte [Používateľský], a potom určte formát na záložke Formát.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 30 Vyberte značku papiera, ktorý chcete použiť.
1c SW_HID_BUSINESS_CARD_CONTENT 6e Vyberte kategóriu vizitiek v poli Automatický text - sekcia a potom kliknite na rozloženie v zozname Obsah.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_VISITING_CARDS%3ALB_AUTO_TEXT_GROUP 4c Vyberte kategóriu vizitiek a potom kliknite na rozloženie v zozname Obsah.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PROFESSION 16 Zadajte svoju funkciu.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT_2 43 Zadajte iniciály osoby, ktorú chcete použiť ako druhý kontakt.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 2a Zadajte svoje mobilné telefónne číslo.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME_2 44 Zadajte priezvisko osoby, ktorú chcete použiť ako druhý kontakt.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PHONE 29 Zadajte svoje domáce telefónne číslo.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STATE 22 Zadajte krajinu, v ktorej žijete.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME_2 46 Zadajte krstné meno osoby, ktorú chcete použiť ako druhý kontakt.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_WWW 36 Zadajte adresu svojej internetovej domovskej stránky.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_WWW 26 Vložte domovskú adresu vašej firmy.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 2d Vložte číslo vášho mobilného telefónu.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_SLOGAN 22 Vložte motto vašej spoločnosti.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP_EXT 33 Vložte ďalšie informácie o vašej spoločnosti.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_PHONE 2f Vložte číslo vášho služobného telefónu.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STATE 41 Vložte názov krajiny, v ktorej sa vaša spoločnosť nachádza.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 19 Vytvoriť nový adresár.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 2d Kliknutím zmažete všetky vybrané súbory.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 45 Vloží vybraný súbor na aktuálnu pozíciu v súčasnom dokumente.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e Pokiaľ vybraný súbor existuje vo viacerých verziách, vyberte tú, ktorú chcete otvoriť.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 23 Otvorí v režime iba na čítanie.
47 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_STANDARD 38 Zobrazí súbory vo východzom adresári používateľa.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 5b Ak chcete premenovať súbor, kliknite naň pravým tlačidlom myši a zvoľte Premenovať.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 78 Presunie sa v hierarchii adresárov o jednu úroveň vyššie. Dlhým kliknutím sa presuniete do vyšších adresárov.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 81 Zadajte názov súboru alebo cestu k súboru. Tiež môžete zadať URL, ktoré začína názvom protokolu ftp, http alebo https.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 7d Vyberte typ súboru, ktorý chcete otvoriť, alebo zvoľte Všetky súbory (*) na zobrazenie všetkých súborov v adresári.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 38 Kliknutím zmažete súbor vybraného názvu v dialógu.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 81 Zadajte názov súboru alebo cestu k súboru. Tiež môžete zadať URL, ktoré začína názvom protokolu ftp, http alebo https.
b .uno%3AOpen 1f Otvorí alebo importuje súbor.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 5b Ak chcete odstrániť súbor, kliknite naň pravým tlačidlom myši a zvoľte Odstrániť.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 34 Zobrazí súbory a adresáre v aktuálnom adresári.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 3d Kliknutím na Zrušiť zrušíte zmazanie vybraného súboru.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 1f Otvorí alebo importuje súbor.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 18 Zvolí označenú cestu.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Zadajte cestu alebo vyberte zo zoznamu.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3b Vyberte vstupný filter pre súbor, ktorý chcete otvoriť.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 34 Zatvorí aktuálny dokument bez ukončenia programu.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Uloží aktuálny dokument.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DEFAULTDIRECTORY 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 56 Uloží aktuálny dokument na iné miesto, s iným názvom alebo ako iný typ súboru.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 56 Uloží aktuálny dokument na iné miesto, s iným názvom alebo ako iný typ súboru.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 56 Uloží aktuálny dokument na iné miesto, s iným názvom alebo ako iný typ súboru.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 18 Creates a new directory.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_THEMA 5f Zadajte predmet dokumentu. Pomocou predmetu je možné zoskupiť dokumenty s podobným obsahom.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_TITLE 19 Zadajte nadpis dokumentu.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_KEYWORDS ad Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons.
32 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_COMMENT 3b Zadajte poznámku, ktorá pomôže identifikovať dokument.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODESC 29 Obsahuje informácie s popisom dokumentu.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_DELETE a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3AED_FILE_NAME 19 Zobrazuje názov súboru.
31 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ACB_USE_USERDATA 78 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
13 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODOC 2a Obsahuje základné informácie o súbore.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_CUSTOMPROPERTIES%3ABTN_ADD 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
1e SFX2_HID_CTRL_CUSTOMPROPERTIES ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO1 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFOUSER 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO4 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO3 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO2 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
f SW_HID_DOC_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
16 SFX2_HID_DOCINFORELOAD 37 Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page.
32 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_RELOAD 40 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3APB_BROWSEURL 46 Nájdite súbor, ktorý chcete otvoriť, a potom kliknite na Otvoriť.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_NOAUTOUPDATE 24 User must refresh the page manually.
38 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_FORWARDUPDATE 5c Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_URL 33 Zadajte URL adresu súboru, ktorý chcete otvoriť.
33 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_FORWARD 57 Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file.
2d sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ACB_FRAME 6f If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_RELOADUPDATE 87 Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser.
28 HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2a HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
1f SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_PROTECTION d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
22 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
30 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
3a HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
23 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_RECORD_CHANGES 50 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record.
38 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2d HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
20 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
32 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
27 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_OPEN_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
17 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINT 47 Prints the name and properties of the styles that are used in the file.
1f SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINTER_SETUP 3f Changes the printer and its settings for the selected document.
2b sfx2%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_EDIT 48 Contains commands for managing and editing your templates and documents.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_DELETE 1e Deletes the current selection.
1b SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_FROM 96 Imports an additional template. To import a template, select a template folder in the list, click the Command button, and then select Import template.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_FILES 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
19 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_TO 1e Exports the selected template.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_LEFT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
1b SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_LEFT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
15 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_NEW 20 Creates a new template category.
2c sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_RIGHT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_DEL 5c Select a $[officename] document type to reset the default template to the original template.
16 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_RIGHT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
10 .uno%3AOrganizer 63 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize templates and define default templates.
36 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_ADDRESSTEMPLATE 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_RESCAN 22 Updates the contents of the lists.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_ADD 71 Uses the selected template as the default template when you create a new $[officename] document of the same type.
22 SVT_HID_ADDRTEMPL_FIELD_ASSIGNMENT 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
35 svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_TABLE 2c Select the data table for your address book.
49 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3APB_ADMINISTATE_DATASOURCES 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
3a svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_DATASOURCE 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 54 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 3b Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 29 Select how many slides to print per page.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 35 Specifies whether to print the current date and time.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fexpander 37 Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 28 Check to draw a border around each page.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 3f Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
27 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsingleprintjob 68 Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 32 Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpaperspersheetlb 32 Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2a Select which pages of a brochure to print.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinttofile 29 Prints to a file instead of to a printer.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinters f9 The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 2d Specifies to print colors as black and white.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 16 Select number of rows.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 7b Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background).
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 86 For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderlb 2e Select order in which pages are to be printed.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcopycount 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 37 Specifies whether to print the page name of a document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 182 If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 52 If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 5d Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Specify how to scale slides in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 19 Select number of columns.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 27 Specifies to print colors as grayscale.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forientationlb 24 Select the orientation of the paper.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 37 Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 26 Specifies to print in original colors.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 83 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 1b Prints the entire document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FPrintDialog 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 3e Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbtn 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
1e vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsetup 6a Opens the printer properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 2d Specify which pages to include in the output.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 35 Select which parts of the document should be printed.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 26 Check to print pages in reverse order.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 8e Otvorí sa nové okno v predvolenej e-mailovej aplikácii, pričom aktuálny dokument sa pripojí ako príloha. Použije sa formát Microsoft.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 83 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used.
f .uno%3ASendMail 8e Otvorí sa nové okno v predvolenej e-mailovej aplikácii, pričom aktuálny dokument sa pripojí ako príloha. Použije sa aktuálny formát.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 2b Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_DELETE 1d Deletes the selected version.
21 sfx2%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_VERSIONS 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_OPEN 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
2d sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_COMPARE 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_COMMENTS%3AME_VERSIONS 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3ACB_SAVEONCLOSE 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_SAVE a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_VIEW 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 51 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
11 CUI_HID_PASTE_DLG 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AMD_PASTE_OBJECT%3ALB_INSERT_LIST 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
2e svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
34 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_CALC_SEARCHIN 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_REGEXP 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
34 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_ROWS 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2f svx%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_MORE 60 Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 45 Rozlišuje medzi formami znaku v polovičnej šírke a plnej šírke.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_ALL_SHEETS 2e Hľadá cez všetky listy vo vybranom zošite.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH 5a Nájde a označí v dokumente nasledujúci výskyt textu alebo formátu, ktorý hľadáte.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK ac Je možné určiť, či sa v japonskom texte hľadá podobná notácia. Zaškrtnite toto políčko a potom kliknite na tlačidlo ... pre určenie možností vyhľadávania.
36 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE_ALL 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
41 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 45 Rozlišuje medzi formami znaku v polovičnej šírke a plnej šírke.
2d SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 3c Nastavuje možnosti pre podobnú notáciu v japonskom texte.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SELECTIONS 27 Vyhľadá iba vybraný text alebo bunky
31 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_LAYOUTS b5 Hľadá text formátovaný štýlom, ktorý určíte. Zaškrtnite toto políčko, a potom vyberte štýl zo zoznamu Hľadať. Nový štýl je možné vybrať v zozname Nahradiť za.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_COMMENTS 48 In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches.
37 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_COLUMNS 1f Hľadá zhora dole cez stĺpce.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLE_WORDS 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE 60 Nahradí označený text alebo formát, ktorý ste vyhľadali, a potom hľadá ďalší výskyt.
33 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_NOFORMAT 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_SOUNDS_LIKE ac Je možné určiť, či sa v japonskom texte hľadá podobná notácia. Zaškrtnite toto políčko a potom kliknite na tlačidlo ... pre určenie možností vyhľadávania.
28 svx_ComboBox_RID_SVXDLG_SEARCH_ED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 30 Rozlišuje medzi veľkými a malými písmenami.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_JAP_OPTIONS 3c Nastavuje možnosti pre podobnú notáciu v japonskom texte.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_OTHER 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_SHORTER 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ACB_RELAX 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_SIMILARITY 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3c cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_LONGER 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SIMILARITY 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 90 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 124 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a check mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a7 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you want to display.
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
29 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
34 SVX_MULTILINEEDIT_RID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL_EDT_DESCRIPTION 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
26 SVX%3AMODALDIALOG%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
2a SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_NAME 1b Enter a name for the image.
31 SVX%3ACOMBOBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3ACBB_TARGETS a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
34 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URLDESCRIPTION 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
16 CUI_HID_REDLINING_EDIT 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPT 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPTALL 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECTALL 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_DG_VIEW b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECT 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_UNDO 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
1b SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PAGE 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_BTN_REF 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK2 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6a Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 47 To display all of the records in a table, click the Remove Filter icon.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 4b Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fvariable 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
1c cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitw 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fautomatic 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Foptimal 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fbookmode 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitwandh 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fsinglepage 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumns 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumnssb 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 99 Zobrazí alebo skryje stavové okno externého programu - editora vstupnej metódy (IME - Input Method Engine), ktorý sa používa pre vkladanie znakov.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility aa Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 12 Inserts a comment.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 1b Delete the current comment.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 1b Delete the current comment.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fdelete 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fsubsetlb 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
32 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2FInsertOLEObjectDialog 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
2c cui%2Fui%2Finsertplugin%2FInsertPluginDialog 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 87 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2FCharNamePage 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb-nocjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-nocjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-nocjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-nocjk 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feaststylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-cjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-cjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-cjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Frelieflb cd Vyberte efekt reliéfu, ktorý sa použije na označený text. Pri efekte "Reliéf" znaky vyzerajú, akoby boli zdvihnuté nad stránkou. Pri efekte "Rytina" vyzerajú, ako by boli zatlačené do stránky.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Ffontcolorlb 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 25 Select the color for the underlining.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Feffectslb cd Vyberte efekt reliéfu, ktorý sa použije na označený text. Pri efekte "Reliéf" znaky vyzerajú, akoby boli zdvihnuté nad stránkou. Pri efekte "Rytina" vyzerajú, ako by boli zatlačené do stránky.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 24 Select the color for the overlining.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinelb 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_LEADZEROES 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_FORMAT 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_NEGRED 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
1d CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_INFO 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
1e CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_LB_FORMAT 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CATEGORY 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
1c CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_ADD 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_THOUSAND 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_COMMENT 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_DECIMALS 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ACB_SOURCEFORMAT 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
1f CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_REMOVE 23 Deletes the selected number format.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
14 CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CURRENCY 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furlpb 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Funvisitedlb c1 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftargetfrmlb 71 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fnameed 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furled 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftexted 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fvisitedlb bf Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2FCharURLPage 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Feventpb 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninged 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsuperscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fraiselowersb 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninglb b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 7f Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fendbracket 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fstartbracket 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_HANG_PUNC 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_FORBIDDEN 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_SCRIPT_SPACE 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_AUTO 7f Zadajte veľkosť voľného priestoru, ktorý chcete ponechať nad vybraným odsekom (alebo nad viacerými vybranými odsekmi).
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTMETRIC 45 Nastavte hodnotu, ktorá bude použitá pre vybraný typ riadkovania.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_STD 40 Nastavuje možnosti odsadenia odseku a rozostupov medzi odsekmi.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LINEDIST 2d Určuje vzdialenosť medzi riadkami v odseku.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_TOPDIST 7f Zadajte veľkosť voľného priestoru, ktorý chcete ponechať nad vybraným odsekom (alebo nad viacerými vybranými odsekmi).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_RIGHTINDENT 176 Zadajte veľkosť voľného miesta, o ktoré chcete odsadiť odsek od okraja strany. Ak chcete aby odsek presahoval za okraj strany, zadajte záporné číslo. Pri jazykoch so smerom textu zľava-doprava bude odsek odsadený sprava, s ohľadom na pravý okraj strany. Pri jazykoch so smerom textu sprava-doľava bude odsek odsadený zľava s ohľadom na ľavý okraj strany.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LEFTINDENT 172 Zadajte veľkosť voľného miesta, o ktoré chcete odsadiť odsek od okraja strany. Ak chcete aby odsek presahoval za okraj strany, zadajte záporné číslo. V jazykoch so smerom textu zľava-doprava bude odsek odsadený zľava, s ohľadom na ľavý okraj strany. V jazykoch so smerom textu sprava-doľava bude odsek odsadený sprava s ohľadom na pravý okraj strany.
42 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTPERCENT 45 Nastavte hodnotu, ktorá bude použitá pre vybraný typ riadkovania.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 94 Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_FLINEINDENT 159 Odsadí prvý riadok odseku o vzdialenosť, ktorú zadáte. Ak chcete vytvoriť vyčnievajúci prvý riadok, zadajte kladné číslo do poľa "Pred text" a záporné číslo do poľa "Prvý riadok". Ak chcete odsadiť prvý riadok odseku, ktorý používa odrážky alebo číslovanie, zvoľte "Formát - Odrážky a číslovanie - Umiestnenie".
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_BOTTOMDIST 7f Zadajte veľkosť voľného priestoru, ktorý chcete ponechať pod vybraným odsekom (alebo pod viacerými vybranými odsekmi).
33 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DELALL 80 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
11 CUI_HID_TABULATOR 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINECOLOR 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_BOTTOM 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_PRESETS 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ACB_SYNC 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AED_SHADOWSIZE 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_LEFT 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_SHADOWS 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_RIGHT 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_SHADOWCOLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINESTYLE 6b Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_TOP 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
e CUI_HID_BORDER 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_SELECTOR 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_PARA_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_BGDCOLORSET 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_PREVIEW 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 71 Click a color. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting color. Click Automatic to reset a font color.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_TBL_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
1f CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
12 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND 24 Set the background color or graphic.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_LINK 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_BROWSE 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3AMF_COL_TRANS 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_AREA 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_TILE 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
1e CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_ALIGN 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_EXPAND 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LASTLINE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_NEXT 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_DESC 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
16 SFX2_HID_MANAGE_STYLES 27 Set the options for the selected style.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_NAME a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_BASE 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
2c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ACB_AUTO b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
2d sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_REGION 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_HEIGHT 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
2c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_ADAPT 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_TEXT_FLOW 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_TRAY ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
13 CUI_HID_FORMAT_PAGE 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_SIZE 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_HORZ 33 Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_REGISTER 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_REGISTER dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_VERT 31 Centers the cells vertically on the printed page.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
32 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_PORTRAIT 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_NUMBER_FORMAT 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_LAYOUT 60 Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_WIDTH 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
35 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
15 SC_HID_SC_HEADER_EDIT 18 Add or edit header text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_HEADER 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_HEIGHT 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
35 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 40 Changes the selected western characters to uppercase characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 88 Changes the case of characters in the selection. If the cursor is within a word and no text is selected, then the word is the selection.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 40 Changes the selected western characters to lowercase characters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_3 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_POSITION 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_4 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_2 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3APB_STYLIST 60 Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2f svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_1 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_1 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_3 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_4 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_2 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2b svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_ADJUST 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 34 Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 62 Rozdelenie bunky alebo skupiny buniek vodorovne alebo zvisle do počtu buniek, ktorý ste určili.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold aa Zmení vybraný text na tučný. Ak je kurzor vnútri slova, je celé slovo označené tučne. Ak je slovo alebo výber už tučné, bude toto formátovanie odstránené.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 53 Upravenie výšky vybraných riadkov podľa výšky najvyššieho riadku z výberu.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 55 Upravenie šírky vybraných stĺpcov podľa šírky najširšieho stĺpca z výberu.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
33 sfx2%3AComboBox%3ADLG_NEW_STYLE_BY_EXAMPLE%3ALB_COL 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstringinput%2Fedit 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_NAME%3ANTD_EDT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_TITLE 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
41 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_DESC e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_EDGE_STYLE 91 Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
11 CUI_HID_LINE_LINE 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_CAP_STYLE 52 Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
37 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
35 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAME%3AEDT_STRING d Enter a name.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3AEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
13 CUI_HID_LINE_ENDDEF 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ALB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 57 Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STEPCOUNT 5d Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
11 CUI_HID_AREA_AREA 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
2f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
33 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_ORIGINAL 8d Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative.
30 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_SCALE fd Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
32 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STRETCH 5a Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
39 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ANUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4a Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ACB_HATCHBCKGRD 6d Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
15 CUI_HID_AREA_GRADIENT 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_FROM 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_LOAD 23 Load a different list of gradients.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_ANGLE 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_ADD 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_FROM 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENT_TYPES 2b Select the gradient that you want to apply.
32 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_TO 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_SAVE 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_X cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_Y c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_TO 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_BORDER 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENTS 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_MODIFY 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_TYPE 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_ADD 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
12 CUI_HID_AREA_HATCH 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_HATCHINGS 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_LOAD 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
14 CUI_HID_TPHATCH_CTRL 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_MODIFY 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_COLOR 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 32 Select a background color for your bitmap pattern.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_COLOR 54 Select a foreground color, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_BITMAP 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BITMAPS 5b Select a bitmap in the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
2f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
43 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ALB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
15 CUI_HID_PAGE_TEXTATTR 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
1d CUI_HID_TEXTATTR_CTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_CONTOUR 54 Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FULL_WIDTH 48 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ANCHOR 0 
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
42 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
13 CUI_HID_TPSIZE_CTRL 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ACBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ORIENT 0 
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
17 CUI_HID_TPPOSITION_CTRL f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
43 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL2 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL1 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_ANGLE 1c Rotates the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_SLANT 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 66 Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ALB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
39 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
29 cui%3ATabPage%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ANUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
11 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_ASIAN_VERTICAL 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ANF_DEGREES a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_VERALIGN 51 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_SHRINK aa Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_HORALIGN 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_HYPH 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
1a CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3AED_INDENT 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_WRAP 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
21 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_BORDER_LOCK 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_TXTSTACKED 17 Aligns text vertically.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 108 Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 45 Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 24 Vyberte farbu okolitého osvetlenia.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 24 Vyberte farbu okolitého osvetlenia.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1e Converts the texture to color.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 135 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl (Mac: Shift+Command), and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 74 Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 80 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
f .uno%3ASpelling 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 7e Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 40 Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Freplaceed af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Falternatives c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fwordcb b6 Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2FThesaurusDialog 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8d Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a5 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 af Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5f Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 90 Nastaví možnosti pre automatické nahrádzanie textu počas písania alebo pre hromadné použitie automatických opráv v existujúcom texte.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_APPLY%3APB_EDIT 2f Upraví možnosti zvolenej Automatickej opravy.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_OPTIONS 87 Nastavte možnosti pre automatické opravy chýb počas písania textu alebo pre hromadnú opravu existujúceho textu a kliknite na OK.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_CLB 87 Nastavte možnosti pre automatické opravy chýb počas písania textu alebo pre hromadnú opravu existujúceho textu a kliknite na OK.
1e CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFORMAT_CLB 87 Nastavte možnosti pre automatické opravy chýb počas písania textu alebo pre hromadnú opravu existujúceho textu a kliknite na OK.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_OPTIONS 87 Nastavte možnosti pre automatické opravy chýb počas písania textu alebo pre hromadnú opravu existujúceho textu a kliknite na OK.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 68 Umožňuje upraviť tabuľku náhrad pre automatické opravy alebo náhrady slov, znakov alebo skratiek.
1f CUI_HID_OFACTL_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 1b1 Zobrazuje zoznam pre automatické náhrady slov, znakov alebo skratiek. Pre pridanie novej položky vložte nahrádzaný text do poľa Nahradiť, text náhrady do poľa S: a kliknite na tlačidlo Nový. Pre úpravu existujúcej náhrady označte položku v zozname, zmeňte text v poli S: a následne kliknite na tlačidlo Nahradiť. Pre odstránenie existujúcej náhrady označte položku v zozname a kliknite na tlačidlo Zmazať.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_SHORT 82 Vložte slovo, skratku alebo znaky, ktoré chcete automaticky nahrádzať počas písania alebo hromadne v už existujúcom texte.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_NEW_REPLACE 32 Pridá alebo nahradí položku v tabuľke náhrad.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_REPLACE eb Zadajte text, grafiku, rámec, alebo OLE objekt, ktorými chcete nahradiť text v poli Nahradiť. Ak ste označili text, grafiku, rámec, alebo OLE objekt vo vašom dokumente, všetky potrebné informácie sú už v tomto poli zadané.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3ACB_TEXT_ONLY 10c Ak je toto pole zakliknuté, po kliknutí na tlačidlo Nový sa položka v poli S: uloží bez formátovania, grafiky a objektov. Pri použití takejto automatickej náhrady sa použije predvolené formátovanie (znakový štýl), aké bude používať text dokumentu.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWDOUBLECAPS 38 Pridá zadanú skratku alebo slovo do zoznamu výnimiek.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_ABBREV 11a Napíšte skratku zakončenú bodkou a kliknite na tlačidlo Nový. Táto funkcia zabezpečuje, že $[officename] nebude pri zapnutej funkcii "Každé prvé písmeno vety veľkým" automaticky meniť prvé písmeno slova nasledujúceho po bodke na konci skratky na veľké písmeno.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWABBREV 38 Pridá zadanú skratku alebo slovo do zoznamu výnimiek.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT 5d Určuje, ktoré skratky alebo kombinácie znakov nebude $[officename] automaticky opravovať.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOABBREV 177 Automaticky pridáva skratky zakončené bodkou alebo slová s dvoma začiatočnými veľkými písmenami do príslušného zoznamu výnimiek. Táto funkcia pracuje len v prípade, ak je zakliknutá možnosť Opraviť PRvé DVe veľké písmená alebo možnosť Každé prvé písmeno vety veľkým v stĺpci [T] na záložke Možnosti dialógového okna Automatické opravy.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_DOUBLE_CAPS 130 Napíšte slovo alebo skratku začínajúcu dvoma veľkými písmenami, v ktorej $[officename] nemá automaticky zmeniť druhé veľké písmeno na malé v prípade zapnutej funkcie "Opraviť PRvé DVe veľké písmená". Zadajte napríklad text "PC", aby $[officename] automaticky nezmenil "PC" na "Pc".
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOCAPS 177 Automaticky pridáva skratky zakončené bodkou alebo slová s dvoma začiatočnými veľkými písmenami do príslušného zoznamu výnimiek. Táto funkcia pracuje len v prípade, ak je zakliknutá možnosť Opraviť PRvé DVe veľké písmená alebo možnosť Každé prvé písmeno vety veľkým v stĺpci [T] na záložke Možnosti dialógového okna Automatické opravy.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_DOUBLE_CAPS 9f Toto okno obsahuje zoznam slov a skratiek začínajúcich dvoma veľkými písmenami, v ktorých nebude automaticky opravené druhé veľké písmeno na malé.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_ABBREV 6e Táto tabuľka obsahuje zoznam skratiek, po ktorých nebudú automaticky opravené malé písmená na veľké.
19 CUI_HID_AUTOCORR_LANGUAGE 79 Vyberte jazyk, pre ktorý chcete vytvoriť alebo upraviť položky v tabuľke náhrad a výnimky pre automatické opravy.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_DBL_STD 31 Nastaví znaky úvodzoviek na východzie symboly.
39 cui%3ACheckbox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_SGL_TYPO 68 Automaticky nahrádza predvolený systémový symbol pre jednoduché úvodzovky znakom, ktorý určíte.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_STARTQUOTE d3 Vyberte špeciálny znak, ktorý automaticky nahradí aktuálne systémové znaky ľavých úvodzoviek počas ich písania, alebo v celom vašom dokumente keď vyberiete Formát - Automatické opravy - Použiť.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STD 31 Nastaví znaky úvodzoviek na východzie symboly.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STARTQUOTE d3 Vyberte špeciálny znak, ktorý automaticky nahradí aktuálne systémové znaky ľavých úvodzoviek počas ich písania, alebo v celom vašom dokumente keď vyberiete Formát - Automatické opravy - Použiť.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_QUOTE_SW_CLB db Vyberte, či sa majú automatické náhrady používať vždy počas písania [T], alebo sa po jednorazovom spustení cez menu "Formát/Automatické opravy/Použiť" majú použiť hromadne v už existujúcom texte [M].
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_ENDQUOTE d3 Vyberte špeciálny znak, ktorý automaticky nahradí aktuálne systémové znaky pravých úvodzoviek počas ich písania, alebo v celom vašom dokumente keď spustíte Formát - Automatické opravy - Použiť.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_ENDQUOTE d3 Vyberte špeciálny znak, ktorý automaticky nahradí aktuálne systémové znaky pravých úvodzoviek počas ich písania, alebo v celom vašom dokumente keď spustíte Formát - Automatické opravy - Použiť.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_TYPO 68 Automaticky nahrádza predvolený systémový symbol pre jednoduché úvodzovky znakom, ktorý určíte.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT 9f To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 66 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR 9f To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST f7 When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ed Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_BULLET 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
1a CUI_HID_VALUESET_SINGLENUM 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
14 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUM 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PICK_BMP%3ACB_LINKED 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUMBMP 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_PREFIX 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ACB_RATIO 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3APB_BULLET 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_BUL_COLOR 2f Select a color for the current numbering style.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_START 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_ORIENT 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_CHARFMT 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMB_BITMAP 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_WIDTH 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
37 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_LEVEL 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_BUL_REL_SIZE 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_HEIGHT 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_SUFFIX a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_FMT 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT_AT 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentatmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
38 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_ALIGNED_AT 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN_2 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_LISTTAB 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
3f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LABEL_FOLLOWED_BY 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2FOutlinePositionPage 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 32 Otvorí označené makro alebo dialóg na úpravu.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Frun 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 19 Vytvorí novú knižnicu.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 54 Otvorí editor $[officename] Basic, v ktorom je možné upraviť vybranú knižnicu.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacros 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 74 Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fassign 6e Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 6c Nájdite knižnicu $[officename] Basic, ktorú chcete pridať do aktuálneho zoznamu a kliknite na Otvoriť.
31 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fedit 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
3d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2FBasicMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Flibraries a5 Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 27 Vypíše existujúce makrá a dialógy.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
33 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_REPEAT_PASSWD 32 Reenter the new password for the selected library.
10 SVX_HID_PASSWORD 22 Chráni vybranú knižnicu heslom.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLD_PASSWD 2c Zadajte staré heslo pre vybranú knižnicu.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_NEW_PASSWD 2b Zadajte nové heslo pre vybranú knižnicu.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 47 Nahradí knižnicu, ktorá má rovnaký názov ako aktuálna knižnica.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 73 Pridá vybranú knižnicu ako súbor len na čítanie. Knižnica je načítaná pri každom spustení %PRODUCTNAME.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS 7d Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcommands 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcategories 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3AEDIT_MENU_NAME 76 Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_CONFIG_MENU_LISTBOX 6e Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 6c Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 79 Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT 99 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fedit 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fdelete 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2FXMLFilterSettingsDialog 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fsave 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnew 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TABPAGE_BASIC 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
1f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXTENSION 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NAME 5a Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DESCRIPTION 1b Enter a comment (optional).
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_APPLICATION 3c Select the application that you want to use with the filter.
24 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_INTERFACE_NAME 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
1d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DOCTYPE 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
2c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 27 Validuje obsah okna Výstup XML Filtra.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 51 Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
e .uno%3AGallery 59 Opens the Gallery, where you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 3a Špecifikuje možnosti na zobrazovanie záchytných čiar.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHANGEPATH 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTODOWNLOAD 90 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 3b Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 1c Continues a paused download.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 1f Installs the downloaded update.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fextensions 7b Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2FExtensionManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass1ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 16 Re-enter the password.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass2ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FPasswordDialog 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 16 Re-enter the password.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 38 Click to show or hide the file sharing password options.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 16 Re-enter the password.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 16 Re-enter the password.
43 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ALLOWDUPLICATEFIELDNAMES 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_VISIBLE 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_TRANSITIONEFFECTS 4d Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_BROWSER 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
36 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTNOTES 45 Selects to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTEMPTYPAGES 190 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTBOOKMARKS f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_NONE 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENAB_ACCESS 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_PDFA_1B_SELECT ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_DEFAULT 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
35 filter%3AListBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ALB_FORMSFORMAT 36 Vyberte formát odosielania formulárov z PDF súboru.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_INSDEL 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ADDSTREAM 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
40 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_DEFAULT b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTFORMFIELDS 6e Zvoľte pre vytvorenie PDF formulára. Tento môže byt vyplnený a vytlačený používateľom PDF dokumentu.
3d FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_INITIAL_PAGE 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_HIGHRES 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
43 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_ANY_NOCOPY 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
3a FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_NUM_BOOKMARKLEVELS 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_SINGPG 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
3f FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_VISIBLEBOOKMARKLEVELS 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ACB_PGLY_FIRSTLEFT 101 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_LOSSLESSCOMPRESSION 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_FILLFORM 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_NONE 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
39 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIND 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_LOWRES 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_OPNFULL 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
40 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_COMMENT 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_JPEGCOMPRESSION ca Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_THUMBS 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIDTH 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_OUTLINE 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
40 filter%3AComboBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACO_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_DISPDOCTITLE 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVTOOLBAR 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_RESINIT 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EMBEDSTANDARDFONTS fd Normally the 14 standard Postscript fonts are not embedded in a PDF file, because every PDF reader software already contains these fonts. Enable this option to embed the standard fonts that are installed on your system and that are used in the document.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_DEFAULT 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
2c filter%3AEdit%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3AED_PAGES 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_CNV_OOO_DOCTOPDF d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
33 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_RANGE 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_PAGEONLY 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
31 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_ALL 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
37 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_SELECTION 1e Exports the current selection.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_CNTRWIN 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_EXP_BMRK_TO_DEST 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
38 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONT 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
3b FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_ALLBOOKMARKLEVELS 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
33 FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_RB_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
35 filter%3AMetricField%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ANF_QUALITY 2d Enter the quality level for JPEG compression.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_TAGGEDPDF 58 Zapíše do PDF súboru PDF tagy. Toto môže značne zväčšiť veľkosť PDF súboru.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVMENUBAR 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVWINCTRL 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
38 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENDAB_COPY 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONTFAC 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_ENAB_RELLINKFSYS 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
34 filter%3APushButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ABTN_PWD 35 Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords.
34 FILTER_METRICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
42 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_APPLICATION c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF a6 Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME f Enter the name.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 1f Declares the item as read-only.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 1e Declares the item as relevant.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f3 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 68 Ak chcete vytlačiť dokument s aktuálnymi nastaveniami tlače, kliknite na ikonu  Tlač súboru priamo
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 19f Nakreslí tvar, ktorý je založený na Bézierovej krivke. Kliknite na miesto, kde chcete krivku začať, ťahajte, uvoľnite tlačidlo myši a potom presuňte ukazovateľ na miesto, kde chcete krivku ukončiť, a kliknite. Presunutím ukazovateľa a kliknutím pridáte na krivku rovný úsek. Dvojklikom ukončíte kresbu krivky. Ak chcete vytvoriť uzavretý tvar, dvakrát kliknite na počiatočný bod krivky.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 19e Nakreslí vyplnený tvar, ktorý je definovaný kruhovým oblúkom a jednou úsečkou. Ak chcete nakresliť kruhový oblúk, natiahnite kruh do požadovanej veľkosti a potom kliknutím definujte počiatok úsečky. Potom presuňte kurzor myši na miesto, kde chcete úsečku ukončiť, a kliknite. Nemusíte kliknúť priamo na kruh. Ak chcete nakresliť eliptický oblúk, podržte počas ťahania kláves Shift.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled be Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line.
e .uno%3AEllipse c6 Nakreslí na určené miesto ovál. Kliknite na miesto, kde chcete ovál nakresliť  a potom ho ťahajte do požadovanej veľkosti. Ak chcete nakresliť kruh, podržte počas ťahania kláves Shift.
b .uno%3ALine 69 Nakreslí rovnú úsečku. Na obmedzenie čiary na uhol 45 stupňov, podržte pri ťahaní kláves Shift.
a .uno%3AArc 170 Nakreslí v aktuálnom dokumente oblúk. Ak chcete nakresliť oblúk elipsy, natiahnite ovál do požadovanej veľkosti a potom kliknutím definujte počiatočný bod. Potom presuňte ukazovateľ myši na miesto, kde chcete oblúk ukončiť, a kliknite. Nemusíte kliknúť priamo na ovál. Ak chcete nakresliť kruhový oblúk, podržte počas ťahania kláves Shift.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 83 Kliknutím otvoríte panel Kresba, pomocou ktorého je možné pridávať tvary, úsečky, text a bubliny do aktuálneho dokumentu.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 15b Nakreslí čiaru zloženú z postupnosti rovných úsečiek. Kliknite na miesto, kde chcete začať, a ťahaním nakreslite úsečku. Kliknutím definujete koniec úsečky a rovnako pokračujte pri určení zostávajúcich častí. Dvojklikom ukončíte kreslenie čiary. Ak chcete vytvoriť uzavretý tvar, dvakrát kliknite na počiatočný bod.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 176 Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee cf Vloží do dokumentu animovaný text s vodorovnou orientáciou. Natiahnite textové pole a potom napíšte alebo vložte do neho text. Na priradenie efektu animácie zvoľte Formát - Text - Animácia textu.
b .uno%3ARect e1 Nakreslí na určené miesto obdĺžnik. Kliknite na miesto, kde chcete umiestniť roh obdĺžniku, a potom ťahajte obdĺžnik do požadovanej veľkosti. Ak chcete nakresliť štvorec, podržte počas ťahania kláves Shift.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText f6 Nakreslí textové pole so zvislou orientáciou textu. Kliknite do dokumentu a potom napíšte alebo vložte text. Tiež je možné natiahnuť textové pole do požadovanej veľkosti. Je k dispozícii len pri zapnutej podpore ázijských jazykov.
f .uno%3ADrawText b5 Nakreslí textové pole s vodorovnou orientáciou textu. Natiahnite pole do veľkosti, akú potrebujete, a potom napíšte alebo vložte text. Ak chcete otočiť text, otočte pole.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 1ab Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
a .uno%3APie 1b8 Nakreslí vyplnený tvar, ktorý je definovaný oblúkom oválu a dvomi úsečkami polomeru zo stredu. Keď chcete nakresliť oblúk elipsy, natiahnite ovál do požadovanej veľkosti a potom kliknutím definujte prvú úsečku. Potom presuňte ukazovateľ myši na miesto, kde chcete ukončiť druhú úsečku, a kliknite. Nemusíte kliknúť priamo na ovál. Keď chcete nakresliť kruhový oblúk, podržte počas ťahania kláves Shift.
e .uno%3AListBox 16 Vytvorí pole zoznamu.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 13 Vytvorí tlačidlo.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 27 Otvorí panel Viac ovládacích prvkov.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 22 Vytvorí zaškrtávacie políčko.
f .uno%3AComboBox 14 Vytvorí Combo pole.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 1c Vytvorí formátované pole.
d .uno%3AConfig 55 The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 1e Vytvorí tlačidlo možností.
f .uno%3ACombobox 14 Vytvorí Combo pole.
b .uno%3AEdit 17 Vytvorí textové pole.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 20 Otvorí panel Návrh formulára.
c .uno%3ALabel 22 Vytvorí pole na zobrazenie textu.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 22 Vytvorí zaškrtávacie políčko.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 1e Vytvorí tlačidlo možností.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 37 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na textové pole.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 42 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na zaškrtávacie políčko.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 39 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na číselné pole.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 34 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na označenie.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 36 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na menové pole.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 87 Otvorí podponuku, kde si je možné vybrať druh ovládacieho prvku, ktorým chcete nahradiť ovládací prvok označený v dokumente.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 3e Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na tlačidlo možností.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 36 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na pole zoznamu.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 42 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na ovládacie pole obrázku.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 3f Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na obrázkové tlačidlo.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 33 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na tlačidlo.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 35 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na pole vzorky.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 38 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na výber súboru.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 3c Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na formátované pole.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 39 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na dátumové pole.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 35 The selected control is transformed into a combo box.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 37 Vybraný ovládací prvok sa premení na časové pole.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 22 Otvorí dialóg Zobraziť stĺpce.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 1d Odstráni označený stĺpec.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 1a Skryje označený stĺpec.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL 71 Otvorí podponuku na výber dátového poľa, ktorým chcete nahradiť vybrané pole v ovládacom prvku tabuľky.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 39 Kliknite na Všetko, ak chcete zobraziť všetky stĺpce.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL 64 Otvorí podponuku pre výber dátového poľa, ktoré chcete pridať do ovládacieho prvku tabuľky.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 8d In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 48 Otvorí podponuku, kde je možné vybrať zobrazenie skrytých stĺpcov.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 46 Otvorí dialóg pre úpravu vlastností vybraného ovládacieho prvku.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 46 Otvorí dialóg pre úpravu vlastností vybraného ovládacieho prvku.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 76 Umožňuje určiť najnižšiu možnú hodnotu poľa. To znamená, že používateľ nemôže zadať nižšiu hodnotu.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 45 Určuje položky poľa zoznamu, ktoré sa majú implicitne označiť.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 3f Určuje najnižší dátum, ktorý môže používateľ zadať.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 2e Určuje minimálnu hodnotu pre posuvný panel.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 19 Nastaví východzí čas.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 6e Určuje, či sa zaškrtávacie políčka a tlačidlá možností zobrazujú ako 3D (východzie) alebo ploché.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE e0 Určuje veľkosť posuvníka posuvného panelu v "hodnotových jednotkách". Napr. hodnota ("Max. hodnota posunu" mínus "Min. hodnota posunu") / 2 bude mať za následok posuvník, ktoré zaberie polovicu posuvného panelu.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 4b Ak je aktívny presný formát (Áno), prijímané sú len povolené znaky.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 65 Určuje formátovací kód pre ovládací prvok. Kliknutím na tlačidlo ... je možné kód vybrať.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 50 Umožňuje zadať hodnotu, ktorá bude pridaná ku skrytému ovládaciemu prvku.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 76 Umožňuje určiť najnižšiu možnú hodnotu poľa. To znamená, že používateľ nemôže zadať nižšiu hodnotu.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 69 Určuje, či sa na Navigačnom paneli majú zobraziť alebo skryť prvky určujúce umiestnenie záznamu.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 48 Určuje, či majú byť ikony na Navigačnom paneli malé alebo veľké.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 78 Na záložke Vlastnosti určuje názov ovládacieho prvku. Na záložke Vlastnosti formulára určuje názov formulára.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 70 Vlastnosť Poradie aktivácie určuje poradie, v akom sa aktivujú ovládacie prvky pri stlačení klávesu Tab.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 1f Určuje intervaly číselníku.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 57 Určuje, či sa na Navigačnom paneli majú zobraziť alebo skryť prvky na navigáciu.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 70 Určuje URL adresu, ktorá bude otvorená po kliknutí na tlačidlo typu "Otvoriť dokument / webovú stránku".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 1b Nastaví východzí dátum.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 73 Určuje, či môže zaškrtávacie políčko reprezentovať okrem hodnôt PRAVDA a NEPRAVDA naviac hodnotu NULOVÉ.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 45 Určuje maximálnu hodnotu času, ktorú môže používateľ zadať.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 6b Ak je vlastnosť "Povolené" nastavená na (Áno), používateľ môže tento ovládací prvok používať.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 2b Vyberte písmo pre text v ovládacom prvku.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 6c Určuje hodnotu, ktorá sa pričíta alebo odčíta, keď používateľ klikne na šípku posuvného panelu.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 34 Umožňuje vybrať viac než jednu položku zoznamu.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 4f Vlastnosť Popisné pole nastavuje označenie ovládacieho prvku vo formulári.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2f Nastaví východziu hodnotu ovládacieho prvku.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 62 Určuje farbu okrajov pre ovládacie prvky, ktoré majú nastavenú vlastnosť Okraj na "plochý".
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 4b Určuje, či sa symbol meny v menovom poli zobrazí pred alebo za číslom.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 32 Určuje, či sa má toto ovládacie pole tlačiť.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 62 Vlastnosť Krok tabulátora určuje, či je možné ovládací prvok vybrať pomocou klávesa Tab.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 5d Určuje, či bude posuvný panel či rolovacie tlačidlo orientované zvisle alebo vodorovne.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 5e Definuje zoznam položiek viditeľných v dokumente. Otvorte tento zoznam a zadajte svoj text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2f Priradí combo poľu automatické vyplňovanie.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1d Vloží oddeľovač tisícok.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 65 Možnosť "Áno" zmení ovládací prvok na rolovacie tlačidlo a pridajú sa zodpovedajúce šípky.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 75 Definuje znakovú masku. Znaková maska obsahuje východzie hodnoty a je viditeľná vždy po načítaní formulára.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 46 Definuje maximálny počet znakov, ktoré môže používateľ zadať.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2f Nastaví východziu hodnotu ovládacieho prvku.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 129 Určuje, či sa tlačidlo správa ako prepínacie tlačidlo. Ak nastavíte Prepnúť na "Áno", je možné prepínať medzi stavmi "vybrané" a "nevybrané" kliknutím na tlačidlo alebo stlačením medzerníku, ak je tlačidlo aktívne. Tlačidlo v stave "vybrané" sa zobrazuje ako "stlačené".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 70 Určuje, či sa má prvý stĺpec zobraziť so štítkami riadkov, kde je aktuálny záznam označený šípkou.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 33 Určuje výšku riadku v ovládacom prvku tabuľky.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 39 Používateľ nemôže zadať vyšší dátum než tento.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 36 Umožňuje zadať znak alebo reťazec pre symbol meny.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 29 Pridá k textovému poľu posuvný panel.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 55 Určuje, či je ovládací prvok len na čítanie (Áno) alebo sa dá upraviť (Nie).
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 71 Určuje, či označený text v ovládacom prvku zostane označený, aj keď ovládací prvok už nie je aktívny.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 34 Zadajte požadovaný formát pre zobrazenie dátumu.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 48 Určuje zarovnanie pre text alebo obrázok použitý v ovládacom prvku.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 65 Vlastnosť Obrázky určuje cestu a názov súboru s obrázkom, ktorý chcete zobraziť na tlačidle.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 4c Určuje farbu symbolov na ovládacom prvku, napr. šípok posuvného panelu.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 29 Pridá k textovému poľu posuvný panel.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 2e Určuje maximálnu hodnotu pre posuvný panel.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 5e Určuje URL odkaz na dokument pomocníka, ktorý sa zobrazí ako pomocník ovládacieho prvku.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4a Určuje doplňujúce informácie alebo popisný text pre ovládací prvok.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 64 Vlastnosť Východzie tlačidlo určuje, ktoré tlačidlo sa použije pri stlačení klávesu Enter.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 68 Určuje, či sa na Navigačnom paneli majú zobraziť alebo skryť prvky pre filtrovanie a zoraďovanie.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 47 Zmení veľkosť obrázku, aby zodpovedal veľkosti ovládacieho prvku.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 41 Určuje pozdržanie v milisekundách medzi opakovaním udalostí.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2f Nastaví východziu hodnotu ovládacieho prvku.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 4f Určuje, či sa má okraj poľa zobraziť "Bez rámca", v "3D" alebo "Plochý".
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 2f Nastaví východziu hodnotu pre posuvný panel.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 29 Pridá k textovému poľu posuvný panel.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 43 Určuje intervaly pre zvýšenie a zníženie hodnoty číselníku.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5a Ak je táto voľba nastavená na "Áno", tlačidlo získa zameranie, keď naňho kliknete.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 4f Definuje hodnotu ovládacieho prvku, ktorú používateľ nemôže prekročiť.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 4f Umožňuje zadať pomocný text, ktorý sa zobrazí ako tip ovládacieho prvku.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 9b Určuje, či sa má opakovať akcia ovládacieho prvku, ak naňho kliknete a držíte tlačidlo myši (napr. pre rolovacie tlačidlo alebo posuvný panel).
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 4e Vlastnosť Činnosť určuje, aká činnosť nastane pri aktivácii tlačidla.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE b1 Umožňuje v poliach (napr. textových alebo označení) používať zalomenie riadku a formátovanie. Pre zadanie formátovaného textu zvoľte "Viac riadkov s formátovaním".
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 48 Určuje zarovnanie pre text alebo obrázok použitý v ovládacom prvku.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 60 Určuje, či sa pri spodnom ohraničení ovládacieho prvku tabuľky zobrazí navigačný panel.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 76 Umožňuje určiť najnižšiu možnú hodnotu poľa. To znamená, že používateľ nemôže zadať nižšiu hodnotu.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 4f Definuje hodnotu ovládacieho prvku, ktorú používateľ nemôže prekročiť.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 74 Určuje hodnotu, ktorá sa pričíta alebo odčíta, keď používateľ klikne vedľa posuvníka na posuvnom paneli.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 61 Definuje vstupnú masku. Zadaním masky určíte, čo môže používateľ do tohto poľa zadať.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE b1 Umožňuje v poliach (napr. textových alebo označení) používať zalomenie riadku a formátovanie. Pre zadanie formátovaného textu zvoľte "Viac riadkov s formátovaním".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 72 Určuje cieľový rámec, v ktorom sa zobrazí dokument otvorený z ponuky "Otvoriť dokument / webovú stránku".
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR 96 Ak textové pole bude použité k zadávaniu hesla, zadajte ASCII kód zobrazovaného znaku. Zobrazí sa namiesto znakov zadávaných používateľom.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Určuje, či sa majú zobraziť alebo skryť prvky akcií na Navigačnom paneli.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 4f Definuje hodnotu ovládacieho prvku, ktorú používateľ nemôže prekročiť.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2a Nastaví farbu pozadia ovládacieho prvku.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 3d Určuje najnižší čas, ktorý môže používateľ zadať.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 31 Umožňuje definovať požadovaný formát času.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 30 Určuje zdroj pre označenie ovládacieho prvku.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 60 Pre textové polia vyberte kód konca riadku, ktorý sa použije pri zápise textu do databázy.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 41 Určuje počet číslic zobrazených v desatinnej časti čísla.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 37 Nastaví východzí text pre textové alebo combo pole.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 3b Určuje, či sa combo pole má stránkovať dole alebo nie.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL fc Pri návrhu formulára je možné v dialógu Vlastnosti formulára na záložke Dáta nastaviť textovým poliam vlastnosť "Filter". V režime filtru si potom je možné pri hľadaní vybrať zo všetkých informácií obsiahnutých v týchto poliach.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 4f Určuje pole v tabuľke zdroja dát, na ktoré odkazuje tento ovládací prvok.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL c9 Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE e6 Umožňuje zadať referenčnú hodnotu pre webové formuláre, ktorá sa odovzdá serveru pri odoslaní formulára. V databázových formulároch sa zadaná hodnota zapíše do databázového poľa priradeného ovládaciemu prvku.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 39 Určuje režim prepojenia poľa zoznamu s bunkou zošitu.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 6d Určuje odkaz na prepojenú bunku v zošite. Prepojí sa stav alebo obsah ovládacieho prvku s obsahom bunky.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 39 Určuje dáta pre vyplnenie polí zoznamov a combo polí.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE c6 V databázových formulároch určuje zdroj dát zoznam položiek pre ovládací prvok. Toto pole je možné použiť pre zadanie zoznamu hodnôt do dokumentov, ktoré nie sú spojené s databázou.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5e Zadajte rozsah buniek zo zošitu, ktoré obsahujú položky pre pole zoznamu alebo combo pole.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 12f Zaškrtávacie políčka a prepínače v zošitoch je možné prepojiť s bunkami v aktuálnom dokumente. Ak je ovládací prvok zapnutý, skopíruje sa do bunky hodnota z Referenčnej hodnoty (zapnutá). Ak je ovládací prvok vypnutý, skopíruje sa do bunky hodnota z Referenčnej hodnoty (vypnutá).
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN 8e Pomocou indexu určíte pole tabuľky alebo SQL dotazu, ktoré sa spojí s poľom určeným v Dátové pole. Platné hodnoty sú 1, 2, 3 atď.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4c The When losing focus event takes place if a control field looses the focus.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 53 Udalosť Text zmenený nastane, keď zadáte alebo upravíte text vo vstupnom poli.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 59 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 61 In this dialog you can specify, among others,  the data source and the events for the whole form.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 3f Upresní metódu prenosu informácií z vyplneného formulára.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 4a The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 51 The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 72 The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 80 If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6b If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fd Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
15 HID_TABORDER_CONTROLS 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 79 In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key.
f .uno%3AAddField 52 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN a6 Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 34 Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 84 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 76 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 92 Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 90 Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 14d Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight color, click the arrow next to the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ab Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 71 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 5b Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 60 Otvorí panel nástrojov, ktorý obsahuje funkcie na optimalizáciu riadkov a stĺpcov tabuľky.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 9f Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
a SID_RELOAD 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 4a Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
1a SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_NAME 2a Assigns a name to an Internet URL or file.
19 SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL 55 Allows you to either type a URL, or insert a URL from a document using drag-and-drop.
13 .uno%3ASetHyperlink 3c Inserts a hyperlink from the current URL into your document.
1c SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_TARGET 36 Specifies the target frame type for the specified URL.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 21 Closes the dialog without saving.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 3e Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 39 Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 3f Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 64 Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 3d Opens a web browser, into which you can load the desired URL.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 67 Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 28 Assigns a news address to the hyperlink.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
d .uno%3APageUp 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3APageDown 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 2d Opens the selected database file for editing.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 68 Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_COLNMS 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TBL_DB_COLUMN 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_TO 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_FROM 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TABLE 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_EMPTY 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ACB_TABLE_HEADON 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_DB 1d Accepts the database formats.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_TO 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_AUTOFMT 79 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_FROM 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_FORMAT 7e Opens the Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
37 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TABLE_COL 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TEXT 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 53 Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 5d Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1d Starts or cancels the search.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 28 Searches through a specified data field.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 28 Searches through a specified data field.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 77 Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 1c Searches through all fields.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 1d Closes the Add Tables dialog.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 13 Shows only queries.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 12 Shows only tables.
f .uno%3AAddTable 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 75 This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 43 Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize c4 Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 86 Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 7e Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 2a Removes noise by applying a median filter.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia a0 All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 24 Specifies to also invert all pixels.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 32 Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 84 Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 55 Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 57 Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4f Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4b With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 52 Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 64 The icon opens the Fontwork Gallery from which you can insert graphical text art into your document.
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 9b Najskôr označte text alebo objekt a potom kliknite na túto ikonu. Následným kliknutím na iný text nebo iný objekt vložíte rovnaké formátovanie.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 5a Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL 62 The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 20 Adds this page to your bookmarks
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 4e Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX 5d The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 2d Finds the next occurrence of the search term.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 27 Provides an overview of the Help system
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 3b Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 23 Hides and shows the navigation pane
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 17 Prints the current page
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 1a Finds complete words only.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 38 Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 1f Moves back to the previous page
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 23 Opens the Find on this page dialog.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND 4e Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 1e Moves forward to the next page
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 31 Moves to the first page of the current Help topic
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 48 The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 45 Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 24 Click to display the selected topic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 6a Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 28 Displays the entry selected in the list.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 3b Click to start a full-text search for the term you entered.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 3d Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS 6c Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word you entered. Incomplete words will not be found.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 4a Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term.
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 22 displays the selected help subject
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 1d deletes the bookmark selected
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE 58 Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 39 opens a dialog for entering another name for the bookmark
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS 7c Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS 56 Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 37 Nakloní vybraný objekt smerom nahor o päť stupňov.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 18 Otvorí okno Osvetlenie.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 1d Otvorí okno Farba vysunutia.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 31 Nakloní vybraný objekt vpravo o päť stupňov.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 31 Nakloní vybraný objekt vľavo o päť stupňov.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 37 Nakloní vybraný objekt smerom nadol o päť stupňov.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 14 Otvorí okno Povrch.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 3f Zapne alebo vypne používanie 3D efektov pre vybrané objekty.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 19 Zadajte hĺbku vysunutia.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 1c Otvorí okno Smer vysunutia.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 1e Otvorí okno Hĺbka vysunutia.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL d Zvoľte smer.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 67 Prevedú vás vytvorením pracovných a osobných listov, faxov, programov, prezentácií a ďalších.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 3f Uloží aktuálne nastavenia a pokračuje na ďalšiu stránku.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 3f Uloží aktuálne nastavenia a pokračuje na ďalšiu stránku.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 2e Spustí sprievodcu a vytvorí šablónu listu.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 39 Umožnia vám zobraziť voľby predchádzajúcich krokov.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 39 Umožnia vám zobraziť voľby predchádzajúcich krokov.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 2e Spustí sprievodcu a vytvorí šablónu listu.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 73 V závislosti na vašich voľbách sprievodca vytvorí novú šablónu dokumentu a uloží ju na váš pevný disk.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3f Uloží aktuálne nastavenia a pokračuje na ďalšiu stránku.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 39 Umožnia vám zobraziť voľby predchádzajúcich krokov.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 97 Spresnite, či použitý papier obsahuje logo, adresu alebo pätu stránky. Sprievodca zobrazí vzhľad hlavičkového papiera na nasledujúcej strane.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 2d Spresnite, či chcete vytvoriť osobný list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 3c Spresnite, či chcete vytvoriť šablónu pracovného listu.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 2a Vyberte vzhľad pre vašu šablónu listu.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 2a Vyberte vzhľad pre vašu šablónu listu.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 37 Spresnite, či chcete vytvoriť formálny osobný list.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2a Vyberte vzhľad pre vašu šablónu listu.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 3c Spresnite či chcete vytvoriť osobný alebo pracovný list.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 3b Nastavuje vzdialenosť objektu od ľavého okraja stránky.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 64 Určuje, či je už na hlavičkovom papieri predtlačená päta. %PRODUCTNAME nebude tlačiť pätu.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 18 Určuje výšku objektu.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 5f Spresnite, či je na hlavičkovom papieri už predtlačené logo. %PRODUCTNAME netlačiť logo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 3b Nastavuje vzdialenosť objektu od horného okraja stránky.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 7f Zadajte výšku oblasti päty, ktorá je už predtlačená na hlavičkovom papieri. %PRODUCTNAME nebude tlačiť túto oblasť.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 18 Určuje šírku objektu.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER 6a Určuje, či je už vaša adresa predtlačená nad adresou adresáta. %PRODUCTNAME nebude tlačiť adresu.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 18 Určuje šírku objektu.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 4f Umožňuje určiť prvky, ktoré sú už predtlačené na hlavičkovom papieri.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 66 Určuje, či je na hlavičkovom papieri už predtlačená adresa. %PRODUCTNAME nebude tlačiť adresu.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 3b Nastavuje vzdialenosť objektu od ľavého okraja stránky.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 3b Nastavuje vzdialenosť objektu od horného okraja stránky.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 18 Určuje výšku objektu.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 40 Obsahuje   spiatočnú adresu malej veľkosti v šablóne listu.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 1f Šablóna listu obsahuje pätu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 43 Obsahuje oslovenie v šablóne listu. Vyberte oslovenie zo zoznamu.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 20 Obsahuje logo v šablóne listu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTLETTERNORM 43 Vyberte krajinu, z ktorej sa má použiť vzhľad typického listu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 2b Obsahuje riadok predmetu v šablóne listu.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 3e Obsahuje riadok s odkazom na pracovný list v šablóne listu.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 41 Určuje položky, ktoré majú byť zahrnuté do šablóny listu.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 43 Obsahuje oslovenie v šablóne listu. Vyberte oslovenie zo zoznamu.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 29 Obsahuje značky ohybu v šablóne listu.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 4e Obsahuje zdvorilostné zakončenie v šablóne listu. Vyberte text zo zoznamu.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 4e Obsahuje zdvorilostné zakončenie v šablóne listu. Vyberte text zo zoznamu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 1d Určuje adresu odosielateľa.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 1d Určuje adresu odosielateľa.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 1b Určuje meno odosielateľa.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 3a Určuje, či šablóna listu obsahuje pole pre vlastníka.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 1c Určuje ulicu odosielateľa.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 3b Spresňuje informácie o odosielateľovi a prijímateľovi.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 37 Do šablóny listu sa vložia polia z databázy adries.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 41 Použiť informácie o adrese z následujúcich textových polí.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 4d Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 1d Určuje adresu odosielateľa.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1d Skryť pätu na prvej strane.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 17 Vložte text pre pätu.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 43 Určuje informácie, ktoré majú byť zahrnuté v priestore päty.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 28 Šablóna listu obsahuje čísla strán.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 5f Zadajte cestu a meno šablóny alebo kliknite na tlačidlo ... pre výber mena cesty k súboru.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5e Uložiť a zavrieť šablónu a otvoriť nový nepomenovaný dokument založený na šablóne.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 5f Zadajte cestu a meno šablóny alebo kliknite na tlačidlo ... pre výber mena cesty k súboru.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 23 Určuje názov šablóny dokumentu.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 3f Uloží šablónu a ponechá ju otvorenú pre ďalšie úpravy.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 42 Určuje kde a pod akým menom bude dokument a šablóna uložená.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b2 Podľa zvolených nastavení sprievodca vytvorí šablónu dokumentu a uloží ju. Na pracovnej ploche sa objaví nový dokument založený na šablóne s názvom "Bez názvu X".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 80 Sprievodca uloží aktuálne nastavenia a prejde na ďalšiu stranu. Tlačidlo Ďalšia sa stane na poslednej strane neaktívne.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK d6 Pre zobrazenie zvolených nastavení z predchádzajúcej strany kliknite na tlačidlo Späť. Aktuálne nastavenia ostanú po kliknutí na toto tlačidlo nezmenené. Tlačidlo Späť bude aktívne od druhej strany.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 1c Otvorí sprievodcu pre faxy.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1c Otvorí sprievodcu pre faxy.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Určuje preddefinovaný štýl.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 2c Definuje štýl vášho faxového dokumentu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 2b Vytvára šablónu faxu pre súkromný fax.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Určuje preddefinovaný štýl.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 37 Vytvára šablónu faxu pre pracovne štylizovaný fax.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 1b Obsahuje logo spoločnosti.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 3d Vloží riadok komunikačného typu. Vyberte text zo zoznamu.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 18 Obsahuje pole na dátum.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 3d Vloží riadok komunikačného typu. Vyberte text zo zoznamu.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET e Vloží pätu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 2c Vloží pozdrav. Vyberte pozdrav zo zoznamu.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 2c Vloží pozdrav. Vyberte pozdrav zo zoznamu.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 32 Určuje, ktoré prvky faxu majú byť vytlačené.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 2c Vloží pozdrav. Vyberte pozdrav zo zoznamu.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 18 Vloží riadok predmetu.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 2c Vloží pozdrav. Vyberte pozdrav zo zoznamu.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 27 Určuje príjemcu a odosielateľa faxu.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 57 Vloží databázové polia, ktoré sa použijú neskôr pri hromadnej korešpondencií.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1d Vložte adresu odosielateľa.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 83 Vloží do šablóny faxu zástupné pole pre adresu. Neskôr v dokumentu kliknite na zástupné pole a zadajte skutočné hodnoty.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 7a Vyberte, ak chcete zadať adresu do následujúcich textových polí. Údaje sa do fax dokumentu vložia ako bežný text.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1d Vložte adresu odosielateľa.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 1d Vložte adresu odosielateľa.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 1d Vložte adresu odosielateľa.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 83 Vloží do šablóny faxu zástupné pole pre adresu. Neskôr v dokumentu kliknite na zástupné pole a zadajte skutočné hodnoty.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 1d Vložte adresu odosielateľa.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 1d Vložte adresu odosielateľa.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 16 Určuje dáta v päte.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 26 Definuje meno a umiestnenie šablóny.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 44 Spustí sprievodcu, ktorý vám pomôže vytvoriť šablónu porady.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 44 Spustí sprievodcu, ktorý vám pomôže vytvoriť šablónu porady.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 24 Zo zoznamu vyberte vzhľad stránky.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 22 Určuje vzhľad strany pre poradu.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4b Vytlačí stranu, na ktorej si môžete robiť poznámky v priebehu porady.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 1a Určuje nadpis stretnutia.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 1a Určuje dátum stretnutia.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 1a Určuje miesto stretnutia.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 31 Určuje dátum, čas, názov a miesto stretnutia.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 18 Určuje čas stretnutia.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 35 Určuje záhlavia, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do porady.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 38 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok prosím čítajte.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 32 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok Prineste si.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 30 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok Poznámky.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 35 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok typ stretnutia.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 5f Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno predsedajúcej osoby.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 57 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno pracovníkov.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 58 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno zapisovateľa.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 59 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno pozorovateľov.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 58 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno účastníkov.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 56 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno moderátora.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 36 Určuje mená, ktoré majú byť vytlačené v porade.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 67 Určuje, či sa má vytlačiť riadok, do ktorého môžete vložiť meno osoby, ktorá poradu zvolala.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 2b Presunie nižšie aktuálnu tému programu.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 2c Posunie vyššie aktuálnu tému programu ..
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 46 Určuje témy programu, ktoré sa majú v šablóne porady vytlačiť.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 23 Odstráni aktuálnu tému programu.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 57 Zadajte témy programu. Pre zmenu poradia tém programu použite tlačidla Hore a Dole.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 57 Zadajte témy programu. Pre zmenu poradia tém programu použite tlačidla Hore a Dole.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 36 Vloží prázdny riadok pre tému za aktuálny riadok.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 57 Zadajte témy programu. Pre zmenu poradia tém programu použite tlačidla Hore a Dole.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 52 Vytvorí a uloží šablónu porady, potom otvorí šablónu pre ďalšie úpravy.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 40 Určuje úplnú cestu, vrátane názvu súboru šablóny porady.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 32 Vyberte nadpis a umiestnenie pre šablónu porady.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 70 Vytvorí a uloží šablónu porady, potom otvorí nový dokument programu porady založený na tejto šablóne.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 1e Určuje meno šablóny porady.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 40 Určuje úplnú cestu, vrátane názvu súboru šablóny porady.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 45 Vráti sa na predchádzajúci krok bez straty aktuálnych nastavení.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 3b Akceptuje nové nastavenia a presune sa na ďalšiu stranu.
c slot%3A10425 8d Použiť sprievodcu na interaktívne vytvorenie prezentácie. So sprievodcom môžete upravovať ukážkové šablóny podľa vašich potrieb
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 8d Použiť sprievodcu na interaktívne vytvorenie prezentácie. So sprievodcom môžete upravovať ukážkové šablóny podľa vašich potrieb
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 8d Použiť sprievodcu na interaktívne vytvorenie prezentácie. So sprievodcom môžete upravovať ukážkové šablóny podľa vašich potrieb
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 108 Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialog box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 3f Kliknutím na Otvoriť sa zobrazí dialóg pre výber súborov.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 27 Vytvára novú (prázdnu) prezentáciu.
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 38 Vypíše dostupné kategórie šablón pre prezentácie.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 31 Zobrazí zoznam skôr vytvorených prezentácií.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 36 Otvorí zoznam obsahujúci upraviteľné prezentácie.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 36 Určuje typ prezentácie a umožní vybrať šablónu.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 38 Vypíše dostupné kategórie šablón pre prezentácie.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 33 Určuje, či sa šablóna objaví v okne náhľadu.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 39 Vytvára prezentáciu, ktorá bude použitá ako snímky.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 40 Vytvorí prezentáciu, ktorá môže byť vytlačená na papier.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 40 Vytvorí prezentáciu na priehľadný materiál pre premietanie.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 2f Použije sa pôvodný formát strany šablóny.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 63 Dovoľuje vám vybrať vzhľad snímok prezentácie, ktorú ste vybrali na prvej strane sprievodcu.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 3f Vytvára prezentáciu určenú len na premietania na obrazovke.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 63 Dovoľuje vám vybrať vzhľad snímok prezentácie, ktorú ste vybrali na prvej strane sprievodcu.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 63 Dovoľuje vám vybrať vzhľad snímok prezentácie, ktorú ste vybrali na prvej strane sprievodcu.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1b Nastaví rýchlosť efektu.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 55 Určuje, či sa má v prestávkach medzi prezentáciami zobraziť $[officename] logo.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 23 Určuje vašej prezentácií efekt.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 56 Možnosť Základné spustí prezentáciu cez celú obrazovku s určenou rýchlosťou.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 49 Priradí vašej prezentácií špeciálne efekty a určí jej rýchlosť.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 30 Definuje prestávku medzi každou prezentáciou.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 35 Definuje dĺžku trvania každej strany prezentácie.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 22 Určuje tému vašej prezentácie.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 6a Toto pole použite pre zaznamenanie myšlienok a nápadov, ktoré chcete povedať vo vašej prezentácií.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 32 Určuje vaše meno alebo meno vašej spoločnosti.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 32 Určuje vaše meno alebo meno vašej spoločnosti.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 3e Vytvorí súhrn všetkých zahrnutých strán v prezentácií.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 3e Vytvorí súhrn všetkých zahrnutých strán v prezentácií.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 44 Kliknutím vytvoríte formulár bez zodpovedania ďalších otázok.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 2b Aktivuje sprievodcu pre tvorbu formulárov.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 36 Určuje tabuľku, z ktorej chcete vytvoriť formulár.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 40 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa kam mieri šípka.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 40 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa kam mieri šípka.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 40 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa kam mieri šípka.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 40 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa kam mieri šípka.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 40 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa kam mieri šípka.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 22 Zobrazí polia v novom formulári.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 36 Pre presunutie vybraného poľa nižšie kliknite sem.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 2b Pre presunutie poľa vyššie kliknite sem.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 40 Kliknutím presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 4a Kliknite pre pridanie podformulára založeného na ručnom výbere polí.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 4b Kliknite pre pridanie podformulára založeného na existujúcej relácií.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 37 Vyberte reláciu, na ktorej je podformulár založený.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 23 Vyberte pre pridanie podformulára.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 45 Zobrazí všetky polia, ktoré budú zahrnuté v novom podformulári.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 46 Určuje tabuľku alebo dotaz, pre ktorý bude podformulár vytvorený.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 72 Vyberte pole hlavného formulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom podformulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 72 Vyberte pole hlavného formulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom podformulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 72 Vyberte pole hlavného formulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom podformulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 72 Vyberte pole hlavného formulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom podformulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 72 Vyberte pole podformulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom hlavného formulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 72 Vyberte pole podformulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom hlavného formulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 72 Vyberte pole podformulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom hlavného formulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 72 Vyberte pole podformulára, ktoré bude spojené s poľom hlavného formulára vybraného z vedľajšieho zoznamu.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 21 Označenia sú zarovnané vľavo.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 3e Zarovná polia databázy do stĺpcov pričom popisky sú hore.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 2c Zarovná označenia nad odpovedajúce dáta.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 25 Zarovná polia databázy do tabuľky.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 40 Zarovná polia databázy do stĺpcov pričom popisky sú vľavo.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 21 Označenia sú zarovnané vpravo.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 22 Vyberte pre zákaz úprav údajov.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 2f Vyberte pre zákaz pridávania nových údajov.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 72 Vytvorí formulár, ktorý sa bude používať na zobrazovanie existujúcich údajov ako aj na zadávanie nových.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 4f Vytvorí formulár, ktorý sa bude používať len pre zadávanie nových dát.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 23 Vyberte pre zákaz mazania údajov.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 21 Určuje štýl strany formulára.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 30 Určuje, že okraje polí majú plochý vzhľad.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 2b Určuje, že okraje polí majú 3D vzhľad.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 22 Určuje, že polia nemajú okraje.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 37 Uloží formulár a otvorí ho pre úpravy rozvrhnutia.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 5f Uloží formulár a otvorí ho ako formulárový dokument pre vkladanie a zobrazovanie údajov.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 1a Určuje názov formulára.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 1b Vyberte vlastnosti správy.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 28 Aktivuje sprievodcu vytvorením správy.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 41 Kliknutím  presuniete vybrané pole do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 41 Vyberte tabuľku alebo dotaz, pre ktorý bude správa vytvorená.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 41 Kliknutím  presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 32 Zobrazí všetky polia zahrnuté do novej správy.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 41 Kliknutím  presuniete všetky polia do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 8d Zobrazuje názvy polí zahrnutých do správy. Pre každé pole, ktoré bude vytlačené v správe, je možné vpravo od neho vložiť popis.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 8d Zobrazuje názvy polí zahrnutých do správy. Pre každé pole, ktoré bude vytlačené v správe, je možné vpravo od neho vložiť popis.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 8d Zobrazuje názvy polí zahrnutých do správy. Pre každé pole, ktoré bude vytlačené v správe, je možné vpravo od neho vložiť popis.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 8d Zobrazuje názvy polí zahrnutých do správy. Pre každé pole, ktoré bude vytlačené v správe, je možné vpravo od neho vložiť popis.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 8d Zobrazuje názvy polí zahrnutých do správy. Pre každé pole, ktoré bude vytlačené v správe, je možné vpravo od neho vložiť popis.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 8d Zobrazuje názvy polí zahrnutých do správy. Pre každé pole, ktoré bude vytlačené v správe, je možné vpravo od neho vložiť popis.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST c2 Zobrazí polia, podľa ktorých bude správa zoskupená. Pre odobratie jednej úrovne zoskupenia vyberte názov poľa a kliknite na tlačidlo <. Je možné vybrať až štyri úrovne zoskupenia.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 40 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané pole do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 40 Kliknutím presuniete vybrané pole do poľa, kam mieri šípka.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING d5 Zobrazí zoznam polí vybraných na predchádzajúcej strane sprievodcu. Pre zoskupenie správ podľa poľa vyberte názov poľa v zozname a kliknite na tlačidlo >. Môžete vybrať až štyri úrovne zoskupení.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 1d Zoradí obsah polí zostupne.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 1e Zoradí obsah polí vzostupne.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 1e Zoradí obsah polí vzostupne.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 1d Zoradí obsah polí zostupne.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 1d Zoradí obsah polí zostupne.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 43 Vyberte dodatočné pole, podľa ktorého sa bude správa zoradiť.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 3d Vyberte prvé pole, podľa ktorého sa bude správa zoradiť.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 1d Zoradí obsah polí zostupne.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 1e Zoradí obsah polí vzostupne.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 1e Zoradí obsah polí vzostupne.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 43 Vyberte dodatočné pole, podľa ktorého sa bude správa zoradiť.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 43 Vyberte dodatočné pole, podľa ktorého sa bude správa zoradiť.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 90 Definuje vzhľad strany pre správu. Vzhľady strán sú načítané zo súborov šablón, ktoré priraďujú záhlavie, pätu a pozadie strany.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 31 Zvolí orientáciu strany pre správu na výšku.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 31 Zvolí orientáciu strany pre správu na šírku.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 63 Definuje súbor štýlov pre správu. Štýly priraďujú písmo, odsadenie, pozadie tabuľky atď.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 7c Uloží správu ako statickú. Keď otvoríte takúto správu, vždy sa zobrazia údaje, z ktorých bola správa vytvorená.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 54 Kliknutím na Dokončiť, sa správa uloží a následne bude otvorená pre úpravy.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 4b Určuje titulok, ktorý bude vytlačený na titulnom riadku každej strany.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 64 Uloží správu ako šablónu. Keď otvoríte dynamickú správu, budú zobrazené aktuálne údaje.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 2d Kliknutím na Dokončiť, sa správa uloží.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 25 Odstráni vybraný návrh zo zoznamu.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 82 Zo zoznamu načíta existujúci návrh pre použitie ako počiatočný stav pre ďalšie kroky na ďalších stranách sprievodcu.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 35 Vytvoriť nový návrh na ďalšej strane sprievodcu.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 35 Vytvoriť nový návrh na ďalšej strane sprievodcu.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 25 Zobrazí všetky existujúce návrhy.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 4f Použite export pre WebCast pre vytvorenie HTML stránky a skripty jazyka Perl.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 3e Určuje čas, počas ktorého bude každý snímok zobrazený.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP a3 Ak vyberiete možnosť ASP, export pre WebCast vytvorí stránky ASP. HTML prezentácia môže byť potom umiestená len na serveri podporujúcom technológiu ASP.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 36 Určuje, či majú byť zobrazené aj vaše poznámky.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 37 Zo strán pre export vytvorí štandardné HTML strany.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 5f Určuje URL (absolútnu alebo relatívnu), kde bude na WWW serveru HTML prezentácia uložená.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 61 V exporte pro WebCast budú vygenerované automatické skripty s podporou jazykov Perl alebo ASP.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 4a Určuje URL (absolútnu alebo relatívnu) pre vygenerované skripty Perlu.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 4c Po zobrazení posledného snímku sa prezentácia automaticky spustí znova.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES b1 Vytvorí štandardné HTML stránky s rámcami. Exportovaná stránka bude zobrazená v hlavnom rámci a rámec vľavo bude slúžiť ako obsah vo forme hypertextových odkazov.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 62 Snímky sa menia automaticky po uplynutí určitého času a nezávisí na časovaní prezentácie
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 84 Vytvorí základnú HTML prezentáciu, v ktorej budú za sebou snímky automaticky nasledovať po určitých časových jednotkách.
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT f3 Prechod medzi snímkami závisí na časovaní, ktoré ste jednotlivým snímkam priradili v prezentácií. Ak ste nastavili ručný prechod medzi snímkami, v HTML prezentácií bude nový snímok uvedený po stlačení ľubovoľnej klávesy.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 37 Zo strán pre export vytvorí štandardné HTML strany.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 55 Určuje URL  (absolútnu alebo relatívnu), ktorú musia zadať diváci prezentácie.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 2b Vytvorí titulnú stranu vášho dokumentu.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 9a Obrázky budú exportované ako JPEG súbory. Súbory JPEG sú komprimované nastaviteľnou stratovou kompresiou a môžu obsahovať viac než 256 farieb.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 63 Určuje, či budú exportované zvukové súbory, ktoré definujú zvuky prechodov medzi snímkami.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 7f Obrázky budú exportované ako PNG súbory. PNG sú komprimované bez straty údajov a môžu obsahovať viac než 256 farieb.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 82 Obrázky budú exportované ako GIF súbory. Súbory GIF sú komprimované bezstratovou kompresiou a môžu obsahovať 256 farieb.
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY c2 Určuje kompresný faktor JPEG obrázkov. Hodnota 100% ponúka najlepšiu kvalitu, ale výsledná veľkosť súboru je väčšia. Hodnota 25% ponúka menšie súbory v podstatne horšej kvalite.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 7f Obrázky budú exportované ako PNG súbory. PNG sú komprimované bez straty údajov a môžu obsahovať viac než 256 farieb.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 47 Vyberie vysoké rozlíšenie pre zobrazenie snímok vo vysokej kvalite.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 3f Vyberie stredné rozlíšenie pre stredne veľké prezentácie.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 7c Vyberte nízke rozlíšenie aby ste zachovali malú veľkosť súborov aj pri prezentáciách s veľkým množstvom snímok.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 5c Určuje adresu vašej domovskej stránky. Hypertextový odkaz bude vložený do publikácie.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 20 Určuje meno autora publikácie.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 20 Určuje meno autora publikácie.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 41 Určuje ďalší text, ktorý bude zobrazený na titulnej strane.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 24 Určuje adresu elektronickej pošty.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 35 Namiesto tlačidiel vloží iba hypertextové odkazy.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 35 Namiesto tlačidiel vloží iba hypertextové odkazy.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 3c Použiť základné farby divákovho webového prehliadača.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 4c Otvorí dialóg Farba, v ktorom je možné vybrať farbu textu prezentácie.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 4e Otvorí dialóg Farba, v ktorom je možné zvoliť farba pozadia prezentácie.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 4c Rozhoduje o použití farieb zo štýlov použitých v aktuálnom dokumente.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 4c Otvorí dialóg Farba, v ktorom je možné vybrať farbu textu prezentácie.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 62 Otvorí dialóg Farba, vo ktorom je možné vybrať farbu navštívených hypertextových odkazov.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 4b Umožní vám pre niektoré objekty prezentácie definovať vlastné farby.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 5c Otvorí dialóg Farba, v ktorom je možné vybrať farbu aktívnych hypertextových odkazov.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 4c Rozhoduje o použití farieb zo štýlov použitých v aktuálnom dokumente.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 68 Kopíruje a konvertuje dokumenty do formátu OpenDocument XML, používaného aplikáciou $[officename].
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 68 Kopíruje a konvertuje dokumenty do formátu OpenDocument XML, používaného aplikáciou $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 68 Kopíruje a konvertuje dokumenty do formátu OpenDocument XML, používaného aplikáciou $[officename].
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 55 Konvertuje dokumenty vo formáte Microsoft Word *.doc do formátu OpenDocument *.odt.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 6b Vytvorí vo vašom pracovnom adresári protokolový súbor ukazujúci, ktoré dokumenty boli konvertované.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 53 Konvertuje dokumenty formátu Microsoft Excel *.xls do formátu OpenDocument *.ods.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 55 Konvertuje dokumenty vo formáte Microsoft Word *.doc do formátu OpenDocument *.odt.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 5b Konvertuje dokumenty vo formáte Microsoft PowerPoint *.ppt do formátu OpenDocument *.odp.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 59 Udáva, či sa hľadané súbory budú hľadať aj v podadresároch vybraného adresára.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 41 Určuje adresár, do ktorého budú uložené výsledné súbory.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 59 Udáva, či sa hľadané súbory budú hľadať aj v podadresároch vybraného adresára.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 2b Určuje, či budú dokumenty konvertované.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 30 Otvorí dialóg pre vybratie požadovanej cesty.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 2f Určuje adresár obsahujúci zdrojové súbory.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 30 Otvorí dialóg pre vybratie požadovanej cesty.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2b Určuje, či budú konvertované šablóny.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 41 Určuje adresár, do ktorého budú uložené výsledné súbory.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 2f Určuje adresár obsahujúci zdrojové súbory.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3e Všetky bunky meny v aktuálnom dokumente budú konvertované.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 53 Udáva názov adresára alebo samostatného súboru, ktorý má byť konvertovaný.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 96 Konvertuje sumy v menách nájdených  v dokumentoch aplikácie $[officename] Calc a v poliach a tabuľkách aplikácie $[officename] Writer na eurá.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 1e Aktivuje nápoveď k dialógu.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 4a Určuje, či budú zahrnuté aj všetky podadresáre vybratého adresára.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 2b Vráti sa na prvú stránku Eurokonvertoru.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 32 Určuje menu, ktorá sa bude prevádzať na eurá.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 55 Všetky bunky meny v rozsahu vybratom pred spustením konvertoru budú konvertované.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1a Konvertuje celý dokument.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 96 Konvertuje sumy v menách nájdených  v dokumentoch aplikácie $[officename] Calc a v poliach a tabuľkách aplikácie $[officename] Writer na eurá.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 11 Začne konverziu.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 50 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné vybrať adresár pre konvertované súbory.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT a6 Určuje, či budú počas konverzie zamknuté listy dočasne odomknuté a potom naspäť zamknuté. Ak sú listy chránené heslom, uvidíte dialóg pre jeho zadanie.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 5d Konvertuje sumy v menách nájdených v poliach a tabuľkách $[officename] Writer dokumentu.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 3f Všetky bunky s vybratými štýlmi buniek budú konvertované.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 38 Zobrazuje rozsahy z listu, ktoré sa budú konvertovať.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 45 Určuje adresár a cestu, kam budú skonvertované súbory uložené.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 15 Zavrie Eurokonvertor.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 44 Otvorí dialóg pre výber požadovaného adresára alebo dokumentu.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 96 Konvertuje sumy v menách nájdených  v dokumentoch aplikácie $[officename] Calc a v poliach a tabuľkách aplikácie $[officename] Writer na eurá.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 73 Konvertuje všetky súbory $[officename] Calc a $[officename] Writer dokumenty a šablóny   vo vybranom adresári.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3c Všetky bunky meny v aktuálnom zošite budú konvertované.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 31 Konvertuje samostatný $[officename] Calc súbor.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 4f Select this option if you already use an address book in Seamonkey or Netscape.
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 55 Ak používate databázu kontaktov z aplikácie Thunderbird, zvoľte túto možnosť.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 54 Tento sprievodca zaregistruje existujúci adresár ako dátový zdroj $[officename].
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 43 Ak používate databázu kontaktov z OS X, zvoľte túto možnosť.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 52 Ak používate databázu kontaktov z aplikácie Evolution zvoľte túto možnosť.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 4c Ak používate databázu kontaktov na serveri LDAP, zvoľte túto možnosť.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 54 Tento sprievodca zaregistruje existujúci adresár ako dátový zdroj $[officename].
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 46 Ak používate databázu kontaktov Groupwise, zvoľte túto možnosť.
c slot%3A10934 54 Tento sprievodca zaregistruje existujúci adresár ako dátový zdroj $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 3d Vytvorí spojenie na dátový zdroj a ukončí tento dialóg.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 3a Ukončí sprievodcu bez uskutočnenia akýchkoľvek zmien.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 62 Ak používate databázu kontaktov z aplikácie Microsoft Outlook Express zvoľte túto možnosť.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 71 Ak používate databázu kontaktov z aplikácie Microsoft Outlook (nie Outlook Express), zvoľte túto možnosť.
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 4b Ak používate databázu kontaktov prostredia KDE, zvoľte túto možnosť.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 70 Ak si prajete zaregistrovať ako databázu kontaktov $[officename] iný dátový zdroj, zvoľte túto možnosť.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 58 Ak používate databázu kontaktov z aplikácie Evolution LDAP, zvoľte túto možnosť.
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 54 Tento sprievodca zaregistruje existujúci adresár ako dátový zdroj $[officename].
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 40 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné zadať ďalšie nastavenia.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 56 Určuje tabuľku, ktorá bude slúžiť ako zoznam adries v šablónach $[officename].
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 1b Určuje názov zdroja dát.
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS d9 Zaregistruje novo vytvorený databázový súbor v %PRODUCTNAME. Databáza bude potom zobrazená v okne zdroja dát (F4). Ak toto pole nie je zaškrtnuté, databáza bude dostupná iba spustením súboru s databázou.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 29 Určuje umiestenie dialógového súboru.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 29 Určuje umiestenie dialógového súboru.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 35 Otvorí dialóg Šablóny: Priradenie zoznamu adries.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 78 Sprievodca vytvorením webovej strany vám umožňuje spravovať webovú prezentáciu uloženú na internetovom serveri.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 78 Sprievodca vytvorením webovej strany vám umožňuje spravovať webovú prezentáciu uloženú na internetovom serveri.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 1c Vymaže vybraté nastavenia.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7f Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "default".
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 4c Vyberte formát súboru, do ktorého si prajete exportovať vybratý súbor.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 21 Zadajte popis vybratého súboru.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC d9 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné vybrať súbory, ktoré si prajete mať na vašej webovej stránke. Hypertextové odkazy na indexovej stránke vášho webu budú zobrazené v rovnakom poradí ako v tomto zoznamu.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 29 Zadajte meno autora vybratého dokumentu.
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 72 Vyberte titulok vybratého dokumentu. Titulok sa objaví ako hypertextový odkaz v obsahu vašej webovej stránky.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 25 Odstráni vybratý súbor zo zoznamu.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS 144 Zobrazí zoznam dokumentov, ktoré si prajete publikovať na vašej webovej stránke. Sprievodca môže dokumenty %PRODUCTNAME pred tým, než budú odoslané na server, previesť do formátu HTML, PDF alebo v niektorých prípadoch i do formátu Flash. Všetky ostatné súbory budú odoslané v pôvodnom formáte súboru.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 24 Vyberte vzhľad obsahu vášho webu.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 3d Vloží do obsahu dátum poslednej zmeny každého dokumentu.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 2c Obsahuje mená súborov dokumentov v obsahu.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 4f Optimalizuje vašu webovú stránku pre rozlíšenie obrazovky 640x480 pixelov.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 23 Zobrazí v obsahu formát súborov.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 2d Zobrazí v obsahu počet strán vášho webu.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 2a Zobrazí v obsahu ikonu formátu súborov.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 20 Obsah obsahuje popis dokumentov.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 3d Vloží do obsahu dátum vytvorenia jednotlivých dokumentov.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 50 Optimalizuje vašu webovú stránku pre rozlíšenie obrazovky 1024x768 pixelov.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 33 Zobrazí v obsahu veľkosť súborov v kilobajtoch.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 3b Vloží do obsahu mená ľudí, ktorí dokumenty vytvorili.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 4f Optimalizuje vašu webovú stránku pre rozlíšenie obrazovky 800x600 pixelov.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 5d Vyberte Ikony, ktoré si prajete použiť pre navigačné prvky na vašej stránke s obsahom.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 30 Vyberte farebnú schému pre stránku s obsahom.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 2f Vyberte obrázok na pozadí stránky s obsahom.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 68 Otvorí dialóg otvorenia súboru, v ktorom vyberiete súbor s obrázkom na pozadí pre stránku obsahu.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 4d Určuje obrázok na pozadí pre štýl Sprievodcu vytvorením webovej strany.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 2d Odstráni obrázok z pozadia stránky obsahu.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 27 Odstráni sadu ikon zo stránky obsahu.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 5a Vyberte sadu ikon pre navigáciu na vašom webe pre Sprievodcu vytvorením webovej strany.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 69 Zadajte adresu elektronickej pošty pre stránku obsahu. Adresa bude uložená medzi HTML meta značkami.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 5b Zadajte dátum vytvorenia stránky obsahu. Dátum bude uložený medzi HTML meta značkami.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 78 Zadajte Informácie o autorských právach pre stránku s obsahom. Informácia bude uložená medzi HTML meta značkami.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 5a Zadajte dátum poslednej zmeny dokumentu. Dátum bude uložený medzi HTML meta značkami.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 63 Zadajte názov vášho webu. Tento prvok bude zobrazený na titulnom paneli webového prehliadača.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 4e Zadajte popis stránky obsahu. Popis bude uložený medzi HTML meta značkami.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL ee Nahrá vašu stránku s obsahom a súbory do lokálneho adresára. Súbor s obsahom bude uložený na miesto, ktoré ste určili. Všetky ostatné súbory budú uložené do adresára "môjWeb" v adresári obsahujúcom stránku s obsahom.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP d5 Odošle vaše súbory na FTP server. Stránka s obsahom bude uložená do adresára, ktorý ste určili. Všetky ostatné súbory budú uložené do adresára "môjWeb" v adresári obsahujúcom stránku s obsahom.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL ee Nahrá vašu stránku s obsahom a súbory do lokálneho adresára. Súbor s obsahom bude uložený na miesto, ktoré ste určili. Všetky ostatné súbory budú uložené do adresára "môjWeb" v adresári obsahujúcom stránku s obsahom.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 25 Otvorí dialóg pre výber adresára.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 63 Otvorí dialóg FTP pripojenie,  v ktorom je možné nastaviť a otestovať nastavenie FTP serveru.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 116 Pridá stránku s obsahom a súbory do komprimovaného archívu a odošle ich na vašu webovú stránku. Stránka s obsahom bude odoslaná na miesto, ktoré ste určili. Všetky ostatné súbory budú odoslané do adresára "môjWeb" v adresári obsahujúcom stránku s obsahom.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 26 Zadajte názov súboru s nastaveniami.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 4e Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné upresniť umiestenie súboru s archívom.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 3c Uloží nastavenia, ktoré ste určili v tomto sprievodcovi.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 61 Otvorí vašu webovú stránku vo východzom  webovom prehliadači vášho operačného systému.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP d5 Odošle vaše súbory na FTP server. Stránka s obsahom bude uložená do adresára, ktorý ste určili. Všetky ostatné súbory budú uložené do adresára "môjWeb" v adresári obsahujúcom stránku s obsahom.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 116 Pridá stránku s obsahom a súbory do komprimovaného archívu a odošle ich na vašu webovú stránku. Stránka s obsahom bude odoslaná na miesto, ktoré ste určili. Všetky ostatné súbory budú odoslané do adresára "môjWeb" v adresári obsahujúcom stránku s obsahom.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 54 Zadajte umiestnenie adresára na FTP serveri, kam si prajete uložiť vaše súbory.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 67 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom je možné upresniť adresár na FTP serveri, do ktorého sa uložia súbory.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 33 Otestuje FTP pripojenie s aktuálnymi nastaveniami.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3b Zadajte heslo, ktoré je nutné pre prístup k FTP serveru.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 57 Upravte a otestujte pripojenie k FTP serveru pre Sprievodcu vytvorením webovej strany.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 4c Zadajte používateľské meno, ktoré je nutné pre prístup k FTP serveru.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2b Zadajte názov alebo IP adresu FTP serveru.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 50 V tejto bunke je možné zvoliť zoraďovanie: vzostupne, zostupne a nezoradiť.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 7c Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 47 Určuje Kritérium, podľa ktorého sa filtruje obsah dátového poľa.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 1d Upraviť vlastnosti relácie.
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 41 Zadajte názov schémy, ktorá sa priradí dotazu alebo pohľadu.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 2f Tu vyberte funkciu, ktorá sa spustí v dotaze.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 44 Databázová tabuľka, v ktorej sa nachádza vybrané dátové pole.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 27 Vyberte podmienky na definíciu dotazu.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 64 Zadajte alias dátového poľa. V dotaze sa namiesto skutočného názvu poľa použije tento alias.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 54 Dvojitým kliknutím na pole ho pridáte do dotazu. Pretiahnutím určíte relácie.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 47 Ak zaškrtnete vlastnosť Viditeľné, dané pole sa zobrazí v dotaze.
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 25 Zadajte názov dotazu alebo pohľadu.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 1e Určuje typ vybranej relácie.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 3a Určuje dve rôzne tabuľky, ktoré si želáte prepojiť.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 3a Určuje dve rôzne tabuľky, ktoré si želáte prepojiť.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 15 Vložte staré heslo.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 1a Vložte znovu nové heslo.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 14 Vložte nové heslo.
1c sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fusered 23 Specifies the name of the new user.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 37 Určuje východziu hodnotu pre nové dátové záznamy.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 40 Ak je zaškrtnuté toto pole, je dátove pole primárny kľúč.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 12 Určuje typ poľa.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 2f V tejto oblasti určujete štruktúru tabuľky.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 1a Zobrazuje texty nápovedy.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 44 Zobrazuje kód formátu, ktorý je možné vybrať tlačidlom  ... .
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 2d Toto tlačidlo otvorí dialóg Formát poľa.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 9b Vloží prázdny riadok nad aktuálny riadok, pokiaľ tabuľka ešte nebola uložená.  Pokiaľ bola uložená, vloží prázdny riadok na koniec tabuľky.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 85 Určuje názov dátového poľa. Pri zadávaní názvu platí obmedzenie databázy, napr. dĺžka názvu, zvláštne znaky a medzery.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 1a Zadajte voliteľný popis.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 11 Zatvorí dialóg.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 4d Zobrazuje zoznam polí aktuálnej tabuľky. Je možné vybrať aj viac polí.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 48 V dialógu Návrh indexu je možné upraviť indexy aktuálnej tabuľky.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 46 Určuje, že aktuálny register môže mať iba Jednoznačné hodnoty.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 27 Uloží aktuálny index do zdroja dát.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST a7 Zobrazuje dostupné indexy. Vyberte zo zoznamu index, ktorý si prajete upraviť. Na pravej strane dialógu sú zobrazené podrobnejšie informácie o vybranom indexe.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Odstráni aktuálny index.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 48 V dialógu Návrh indexu je možné upraviť indexy aktuálnej tabuľky.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Premenuje aktuálny index.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 15 Vytvorí nový index.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 49 Obnoví aktuálny index na nastavenia, ktoré mal pri otvorení dialógu.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1d Určuje poradie zoraďovania.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 63 Pomocou spoločných dátových polí je možné navzájom prepojiť tabuľky aktuálnej databázy.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 44 Reláciu medzi dvoma tabuľkami je možné nastaviť alebo upraviť.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 48 Ako názvy stĺpcov sa zobrazia názvy tabuliek vybraných pre spojenie.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 48 Ako názvy stĺpcov sa zobrazia názvy tabuliek vybraných pre spojenie.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 21 Určuje polia kľúčov relácii.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 16 Zadajte názov kópie.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 40 Pripojí dáta z kopírovanej tabuľky do existujúcej tabuľky.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW 70 Ak databáza podporuje pohľady, je možné pri kopírovaní dotazu do zložky tabuliek zvoliť túto možnosť.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 51 Určuje názov vygenerovaného primárneho kľúča. Tento názov je voliteľný.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 30 Zkopíruje len definíciu tabuľky a nie údaje.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 2e Vytvorí presnú kópiu databázovej tabuľky.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3f Zoznam polí, ktoré chcete zahrnúť do kopírovanej tabuľky.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 67 Pridá alebo odstráni vybrané pole (tlačidlo > alebo <) alebo všetky polia (tlačidlo << alebo >>).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 67 Pridá alebo odstráni vybrané pole (tlačidlo > alebo <) alebo všetky polia (tlačidlo << alebo >>).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 67 Pridá alebo odstráni vybrané pole (tlačidlo > alebo <) alebo všetky polia (tlačidlo << alebo >>).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES ff Vypíše zoznam dostupných dátových polí, ktoré je možné vložiť do kopírovanej tabuľky.  Ak chcete skopírovať dátové pole, kliknite na jeho názov a potom kliknite na tlačidlo >. Pre skopírovanie všetkých polí kliknite na tlačidlo >>.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 67 Pridá alebo odstráni vybrané pole (tlačidlo > alebo <) alebo všetky polia (tlačidlo << alebo >>).
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 31 Vyberte výchoziu hodnotu pre pole typu Áno/Nie.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 49 Zoznam dátových polí, ktoré budú zahrnuté do kopírovanej tabuľky.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 28 Umožnuje automatické rozpoznanie typu.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 12 Vyberte typ poľa.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 27 Zadajte počet znakov dátového poľa.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 4e Zadajte počet riadkov, ktoré sa použijú na automatické rozpoznánie typu.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 27 Zadajte počet znakov dátového poľa.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 67 Zadajte počet desetinných miest dátového poľa. Táto voľba je dostupná len pre číselné polia.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 56 Zobrazuje názov vybraného dátového poľa. Taktiež je možné zadať nový názov.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 29 Vyberie všetky dátové polia v zozname.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 34 Posunie vybranú položku o jednu pozíciu vyššie.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 17b Zoznam dátových polí v zdrojovej tabuľke. Ak chcete vložiť dátové pole zo zdrojovej tabuľky do cieľovej tabuľky, zaškrtnite pole pred názvom dátového poľa. Ak chcete priradiť obsah dátového poľa zdrojovej tabuľky inému dátovému poľu v cieľovej tabuľke, kliknite na dátové pole v zozname zdrojovej tabuľky a potom kliknite na šípku hore alebo dole.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 35 Zruší výber všetkých dátových polí v zozname.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 34 Posunie vybranú položku o jednu pozíciu vyššie.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 34 Posunie vybranú položku o jednu pozíciu nižšie.
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 34 Posunie vybranú položku o jednu pozíciu nižšie.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN a3 Zoznam možných dátových polí v cieľovej tabuľke. Do cieľovej tabuľky sa pridajú len dátové polia, ktoré sú zaškrtnuté v zozname zdrojové tabuľky.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 5f Povoľuje iba názvy, ktoré v zdroji dát používajú znaky zodpovedajúce obmedzeniam SQL92.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b1 Použije súčasný zdroj dát ako katalóg. To je užitočné, ak je zdrojom dát databázový server ODBC. Ak je zdrojom dát ODBC ovládač dBASE, toto pole nezaškrtávajte.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 59 Do tohoto textového poľa zadajte prípadné daľšie voliteľné nastavenia ovládača.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 73 Zadajte SQL dotaz, ktorý vracia poslednú hodnotu automatického zvýšenia dátového poľa primárneho kľúča.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 65 Zadajte SQL príkaz, ktorý zdroju dát určí automaticky zvyšovať dané číselné dátové pole.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 75 Zapíná podporu $[officename] pre automatické zvyšovanie dátových polí pre aktuálny ODBC nebo JDBC zdroj dát.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 64 Otvorí dialóg Indexy, v kterom je možné spravovať indexy tabuliek v aktuálnej databáze dBASE.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 9b Zobrazí všetky záznamy v súbore, vrátane tých, ktoré sú označené ako odstránené. Ak zaškrtnete toto pole, nie je možné záznamy odstrániť.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 42 Vyberte databázovú tabuľku, pre ktorú chcete vytvoriť indexy.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 3b Presunie vybraný index tabuľky do zoznamu Voľné indexy.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 3b Presunie všetky indexy tabuľky do zoznamu Voľné indexy.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 47 Zobrazí zoznam aktuálnych indexov pre vybranú databázovú tabuľku.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 3b Presunie všetky voľné indexy do zoznamu Indexy tabuľky.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 33 Presunie vybraný index do zoznamu Indexy tabuľky.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 4a Zobrazí zoznam dostupných indexov, ktoré je možné priradiť tabuľke.
2f dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3ALB_HISTORY 7b Zoznam skôr spustených SQL príkazov. K opätovnému spusteniu príkazu kliknite na príkaz a potom kliknite na Spustiť.
34 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_STATUS 3e Zobrazuje výsledky, vrátane chýb, spusteného SQL príkazu.
31 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_SQL 3f Zadajte administrátorský príkaz SQL, ktorý chcete spustiť.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3APB_EXECUTE 41 Spustí príkaz, ktorý ste zadali do poľa Príkaz na spustenie.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL de Niektoré databázy môžu sledovať zmeny záznamov priradením čísla verzie upraveným poliam. Toto číslo sa pri každej zmene pola zvýši o 1.  Zobrazuje se interné číslo verzie záznamu v databázovej  tabulke.
d .uno%3ASortup 45 Zoradí zoznam názvov tabuliek vo vzostupnom poradí podľa abecedy.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 55 Zobrazí prístupové práva daného uživateľa. Je tu tiež možnosť ich upraviť.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 41 Zmení heslo aktuálneho používateľa pre prístup k databáze.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 41 Zadejte nového používateľa pre prístup k vybranej databáze.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 21 Odstráni vybraného uživateľa.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 3c Vyberte používateľa, ktorého nastavenia chcete upraviť.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 2f Zobrazí cestu a názov súboru TRANSACTIONLOG.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 4d Zobrazí voľné miesto (v megabajtoch), ktoré je v databáze k dispozícii.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 36 Zobrazí celkovú veľkosť databázy (v megabajtoch).
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 40 Zobrazí množstvo využitého miesta v databáze v percentách.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 2d Zobrazí cestu a názov súboru DATADEVSPACE.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 2c Zobrazí cestu a názov súboru SYSDEVSPACE.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR 9e Zadajte meno doménového používateľa, ktoré Adabas používá interne. Obvykle sa východzie nastavenia mena a hesla doménového používateľa nemenia.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD e Zadajte heslo.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 2e Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD e Zadajte heslo.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 25 Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 34 Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR c5 Zadajte meno používateľa, ktorému chcete udeľiť obmedzenú možnosť upravovať niektoré parametre databázy. Obvykle sa východzie nastavenia mena a hesla riadiaceho používateľa nemenia.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 19 Zadajte názov databázy.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 4d Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD e Zadajte heslo.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 27 Zadajte meno administrátora databázy.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 27 Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 2c Enter the path for the transaction log file.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 5f Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 35 Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 38 Select the type of database that you want to connect to.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 61 If checked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 1f Enter the name of the database.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 2f Enter the path to the folder of the text files.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC 62 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT a6 Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 20 Select to create a new database.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 118 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Fields - Other) or in a mail merge.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 28 Specifies the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 30 A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 2b A password must contain 3 to 18 characters.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 2a Click to open a database selection dialog.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 28 Enter the path to the dBASE *.dbf files.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 1d Open a path selection dialog.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 24 Enter the path to the database file.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 33 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog:
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 2e Enter the port number for the database server.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 26 Enter the name of the Oracle database.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 26 Enter the URL for the database server.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 87 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 81 Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 1a Click to access csv files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 1a Click to access txt files.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 21 Opens the Connection Type Wizard.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 25 Opens the Database Properties dialog.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 25 Opens the Advanced Properties dialog.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail fe Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 2c Click to save the form to the database file.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 2f Zadajte názov súboru pre ukladaný formulár.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 48 Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 44 Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 4b Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 38 Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 10 Opens a submenu.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
d .uno%3ADBSort 10 Opens a submenu.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 99 Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 31 Enter the password to connect to the data source.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 32 Enter the user name to connect to the data source.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 23 Enter the alias for the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1c Enter the name of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_TIME 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_DATE 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
3b REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_BOTTOMPAGE 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
38 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_TOPPAGE 14 Top of Page (Header)
32 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N 6 Page N
32 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_PAGENUMBERS_LST_ALIGNMENT 9 Alignment
37 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N_OF_M b Page N of M
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4d Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 54 Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs)
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1c Deletes the selected report.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 1b Deletes the selected query.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 1b Renames the selected query.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 57 Otvorí vybraný dotaz tak, aby ste mohli zadávať, upravovať alebo zmazať záznamy.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1c Renames the selected report.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 1a Renames the selected form.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1b Renames the selected table.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1b Deletes the selected table.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 1a Deletes the selected form.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 6c Prepne výšku písmen vybraného objektu písmomaľby z normálnej na rovnakú výšku pre všetky objekty.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 4c Kliknite pre použitie rozostupu znakov písmomaľby na vyznačené objekty.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 25 Otvorí okno Zarovnanie písmomaľby.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes 64 Otvorí panel Tvar písmomaľby. Kliknite na tvar na jeho použitie na všetky objekty písmomaľby.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 2a Otvorí okno Písmomaľba-rozostup znakov.
c FontWork1TBO 42 Kliknutím aplikujete zarovnanie na vybrané objekty písmomaľby.
c FontWork2TBO 25 Zadajte rozostup znakov písmomaľby.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS a5 Ak sú rovnaké obsahy zmenené rôznymi používateľmi, otvorí sa dialóg Riešenie Konfliktov. Pri každom konflikte rozhodnite, ktoré zmeny sa majú zachovať.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SHAREDOCUMENT%3ACB_SHARE 10f Povolenie zdieľať ten istý dokument s inými používateľmi. Zakázať použitie nezdieľaných dokumentov. Toto môže zrušiť platnosť doteraz neuložených úprav, ktoré vykonali iní používatelia od doby, čo bol dokument naposledy otvorený alebo uložený.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 39 Zachovajte všetky vaše zmeny, zrušte všetky ostatné.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 80 Otvorenie dialógu na nastavenie zdieľania dokumentu, kde sa dá povoliť alebo zakázať spoluprácu so zdieľaním dokumentu.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 30 Zachovajte vaše zmeny, zrušte ostatné zmeny .
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 55 Zachovajte všetky zmeny ostatných používateľov, odstráňte všetky vaše zmeny.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 40 Zachovajte zmenu iného používateľa, odstráňte vašu zmenu.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 5f Pokiaľ kliknete na ikonu Použiť filter na paneli Filtrovanie formulára, použije sa filter.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 6a Pokiaľ kliknete na tlačidlo Zavrieť na paneli Filtrovanie formulára, zobrazí sa formulár bez filtru.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 47 Otvorte okno, v ktorom môžete pridať, upraviť alebo odobrať ikony.
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL d3 Podmienku filtra môžete upraviť priamo ako text. Pokiaľ chcete testovať, či pole má alebo nemá obsah, môžete vybrať podmienku filtra "prázdne" (SQL:"Is Null") alebo "neprázdne" (SQL: "Is not Null").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 195 The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions.
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT d3 Podmienku filtra môžete upraviť priamo ako text. Pokiaľ chcete testovať, či pole má alebo nemá obsah, môžete vybrať podmienku filtra "prázdne" (SQL:"Is Null") alebo "neprázdne" (SQL: "Is not Null").
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL d3 Podmienku filtra môžete upraviť priamo ako text. Pokiaľ chcete testovať, či pole má alebo nemá obsah, môžete vybrať podmienku filtra "prázdne" (SQL:"Is Null") alebo "neprázdne" (SQL: "Is not Null").
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 7a Ak chcete spojiť viac podmienok pre filtre booleovským OR, kliknite na Navigácia filtra na paneli Formulárový Filter.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 99 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Graphics Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
18 .uno%3ANextTrackedChange 3d Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any.
1c .uno%3APreviousTrackedChange 41 Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 35 The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 3c The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 32 Zobrazí dialóg Licenčné a právne informácie.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu 50 Menu Pomocník umožňuje spustiť a ovládať systém pomocníka $[officename].
c .uno%3AAbout 52 Zobrazí všeobecné informácie o programe ako číslo verzie a autorské práva.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits c9 Zobrazí dokument CREDITS.odt, ktorý obsahuje zoznam jednotlivcov, ktorí od 28. 9. 2010 prispeli do zdrojového kódu OpenOffice.org (a ich príspevky boli importované do LibreOffice) a LibreOffice.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate ee Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 4f Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 51 Otvorí hlavnú stránku pomocníka $[officename] pre práve bežiacu aplikáciu.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 43 Štandardný panel je dostupný v každej aplikácii $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 54 Povolí rozšírené tipy pomocníka pod kurzorom myši až do ďalšieho kliknutia.
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 7e Panel Tabuľka obsahuje funkcie, ktoré potrebujete na prácu s tabuľkou. Zobrazí sa, pokiaľ umiestnite kurzor do tabuľky.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 5e Spustí Sprievodcu hromadnou korešpondenciou, ktorý vám pomôže vytvoriť hromadné listy.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns 5b Vloží všetky polia z označeného záznamu do aktuálneho dokumentu na pozíciu kurzoru.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 17 Vytvorí nový záznam.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 41 Odstráni záznam. Príkaz je treba pred odstránením potvrdiť.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 33 Umožňuje vám vrátiť zmenu v dátovej položke.
e .uno%3ARecSave 44 Uloží novú dátovú položku. Zmena je zaznamenaná do databázy.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 26 Presunie vás na nasledujúci záznam.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 23 Presunie vás na posledný záznam.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 1f Presunie vás na prvý záznam.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 2a Presunie vás na predchádzajúci záznam.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord 54 Zobrazuje číslo aktuálneho záznamu. Zadajte číslo k prechodu na daný záznam.
e .uno%3AGridUse 45 Určuje, že je možné pohybovať objektmi len medzi bodmi mriežky.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 3a Prevedie rohový bod alebo hladký bod na symetrický bod.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX 65 Panel Upraviť body sa zobrazí, keď vyberiete objekt zložený z bodov a kliknete na Upraviť body.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete 9c Pomocou ikony Zmazať body odstránite jeden alebo viac vybraných bodov. Ak chcete vybrať niekoľko bodov, podržte Shift a kliknite na požadované body.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 33 Prevedie krivku na priamku alebo priamku na krivku.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 1c Uzavrie čiaru alebo krivku.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 38 Prevedie uhlový bod alebo súmerný bod na hladký bod.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 44 Aktivuje režim vkladania. V tomto režime je možné vkladať body.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 34 Aktivuje režim, v ktorom je možné presúvat body.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 70 Ikona Rozdeliť krivku rozdelí krivku. Vyberte bod alebo body, kde chcete krivku rozdeliť a kliknite na ikonu.
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 3b Označí aktuálny bod alebo vybrané body na odstránenie.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 31 Prevedie vybratý bod alebo body na uhlové body.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 43 This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 18 Select an entry to edit.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT 13 Type your initials.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TITLE 1e Type your title in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_CITY 1d Type the city where you live.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FIRSTNAME 15 Type your first name.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME 14 Type your last name.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_SHORTNAME 13 Type your initials.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COUNTRY 10 Type your state.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELCOMPANY 24 Type your work number in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP 2c Type the name of your company in this field.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 10 Type your state.
17 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_GENERAL 2d Use this tab page to enter or edit user data.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_CITY 1d Type the city where you live.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MAIL 19 Type your e-mail address.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_PLZ 1c Type your ZIP in this field.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME 15 Type your first name.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COMPANY 2c Type the name of your company in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_TITLE 1e Type your title in this field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_CITY 1d Type the city where you live.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MAIL 19 Type your e-mail address.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_STATE 10 Type your state.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_NAME 14 Type your last name.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_POSITION 30 Type your position in the company in this field.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 10 Type your state.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_POSITION 30 Type your position in the company in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_ZIP 1c Type your ZIP in this field.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_ZIPCODE 1c Type your ZIP in this field.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELPRIVAT 31 Type your private telephone number in this field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_ZIP 1c Type your ZIP in this field.
2c cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_CITY 1d Type the city where you live.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_EMAIL 19 Type your e-mail address.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_AUTOSAVE 94 Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the saving time interval.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_INET 3c Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_FSYS 3f Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system.
29 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_APP 51 Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_SETTINGS 47 Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_SAVE 72 In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_ODF_VERSION fc Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_DOCPRINTER 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
38 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_ALIEN_WARNING%3ACB_WARNING_OFF c2 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_BACKUP d5 Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_WARNALIENFORMAT c2 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_NOPRETTYPRINTING 61 When saving the document, %PRODUCTNAME writes the XML data without indents and extra line breaks.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_FILTER b1 Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialog.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_DOCINFO 5b Specifies that the Properties dialog will appear every time you select the Save As command.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3AED_AUTOSAVE 49 Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option.
18 CUI_HID_OPTPATH_CTL_PATH 65 To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_PATH 36 Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PATH 75 This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_STANDARD 48 The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH 60 Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH 5f Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files.
1b CUI_HID_LNGDLG_NUM_PREBREAK 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_WORD 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_MODULES_EDIT 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_EDIT_DIC 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_NEW_DIC 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_OPTIONS_EDIT 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 26 Lists the available user dictionaries.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_NEW_REPLACE a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 37 Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 41 Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 3b Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_LNG_ED_NUM_PREBREAK%3AED_PREBREAK 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 46 Specifies the properties of the spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_DEL_DIC 59 Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_ALLDICTS 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ABTN_EXCEPT 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 28 Contains the installed language modules.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_REPLACE a6 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 4b Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 4b Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES 71 Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 25 Specifies the language of the module.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 37 Click here to undo the current changes in the list box.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 5 Green
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 3 Red
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL 5c To modify, select the color model: Red-Green-Blue (RGB) or Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-BlacK (CMYK).
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE 63 Opens the Save As dialog, which enables you to save the current color table under a specified name.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 11 Adds a new color.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME 69 Specifies the name of a selected color. You can also type a name in this field when defining a new color.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR 5e Allows you to select a color from a color table, edit an existing color, or define new colors.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 44 Accesses the Open dialog, which allows you to select a color palette
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 1a Changes the current color.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 51 Contains a list of available colors. To select a color, choose one from the list.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 4 Blue
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 44 Accesses the Open dialog, which allows you to select a color palette
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 2b Sets the Brightness in the HSB color model.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 24 Sets the Hue in the HSB color model.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 42 Sets the Black color value or key (black) in the CMYK color model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 35 Sets the Magenta color value in the CMYK color model.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 42 Sets the Black color value or key (black) in the CMYK color model.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 b7 Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the color, which corresponds to the selected color in the left window and updates the respective values in the numerical fields.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 32 Sets the Cyan color value in the CMYK color model.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 b7 Click the <-- button to replace the selected color in the color palette with the color selected at the right. The button is enabled when you select a color in one of the four corners.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 31 Sets the Blue color value in the RGB color model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 34 Sets the Yellow color value in the CMYK color model.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 34 Sets the Yellow color value in the CMYK color model.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 32 Sets the Green color value in the RGB color model.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 30 Sets the Red color value in the RGB color model.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 35 Sets the Magenta color value in the CMYK color model.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 2b Sets the Saturation in the HSB color model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 32 Sets the Cyan color value in the CMYK color model.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_TOOLTIP 86 Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters.
33 cui%3APushButton%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3APB_HELPAGENT_RESET 67 Click Reset Help Agent to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_EXTHELP 63 Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_HELPAGENT b0 Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. Click the Help Agent window to see a Help page with information about the current context.
2f cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ANF_YEARVALUE 4a Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_DOCSTATUS 48 Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_FILEDLG 84 Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTHEIGHT 41 Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_USETABLE 36 Enables the font replacement settings that you define.
18 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_DELETE 26 Deletes the selected font replacement.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT2 31 Enter or select the name of the replacement font.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT1 3e Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace.
1d CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBSTITUTION e6 Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_NONPROP 43 Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTNAME 3e Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
1a CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBST_CLB f0 Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing.
17 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_APPLY 26 Applies the selected font replacement.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT 67 Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogs. Else another installed font is used.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT 67 Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogs. Else another installed font is used.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 17 Specifies view options.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 52 Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView 87 Specifies whether to restore the last used document view. Many view properties valid when the document was last saved will be restored.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 4a Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 7a Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 82 Lists the last five fonts that you used in the current document at the top of the list in the Font Name box on the Formatting bar.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION b0 If enabled, the text selection in Writer and the cell selection in Calc will be shown using a transparent color. If not enabled, the selection will be shown by inverted colors.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 30 Defines the function of the middle mouse button.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW 7b Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 62 Uses percentile scaling for font size in user interface elements, such as dialogs and icon labels.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL 63 Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display.
44 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_NORMAL 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
3f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY a5 If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons.
36 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERSIZE 58 Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_AUTO 76 Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page.
3f sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTFILEOUTPUT 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
3a sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
44 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ALB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
39 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_TRANSPARENCY 69 Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_COLOR 49 Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_OPTIMAL 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STRIPES 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
47 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS_TRANSPARENCY 75 If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects.
48 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
3c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEGRADIENTS 44 If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
3d sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTEROUTPUT 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
4a sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STEPCOUNT 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
3d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERORIENTATION 5e Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_NONE 2f With this option transparency is never printed.
40 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_CONVERTTOGREYSCALES 38 Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
30 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_OLECACHE 46 Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ACB_QUICKLAUNCH 89 Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICOBJECTCACHE 64 Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache.
36 cui%3ATimeField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ATF_GRAPHICOBJECTTIME 4f Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes.
2c cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3AED_UNDO 5b You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the box.
34 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICCACHE 30 Specifies the total cache size for all graphics.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 22 Enter a name for the color scheme.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_SAVESCHEME 47 Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3ALB_COLORSCHEME 29 Selects the color scheme you want to use.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_DELETESCHEME 57 Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme.
29 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_COLORLIST_WIN 32 Select the colors for the user interface elements.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTO_DETECT_HC 5c Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TIPHELP 3f Hides the Help tips after the number of seconds that you enter.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_GRAPHICS 40 Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ANF_TIPHELP 35 Enter the number of seconds to display the Help tips.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TEXTSELECTION 27 Displays cursor in read-only documents.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_PAGE_PREVIEWS 4c Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ACCESSIBILITY_TOOL e1 Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTOMATIC_FONT_COLOR 6c Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_TEXTS 48 Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PROXY 2a Type the name of the proxy server for FTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PROXY 2b Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_SOCKS_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_NOPROXYFOR 62 Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PROXY 27 Specifies the type of proxy definition.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PROXY 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3ALB_PROXYMODE 27 Specifies the type of proxy definition.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MOZPLUGIN%3ACB_MOZPLUGIN_CODE c4 Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SIGNDOCS cb Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_CHANGE 51 Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVEALL 22 Removes all entries from the list.
42 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_REPEAT 20 Enter the master password again.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CTRLHYPERLINK 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
37 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD 26 Enter the master password to continue.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3ACB_SEC_SAVEPASSWORDS bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_RECOMMENDPWD 8e Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_CONNECTIONS 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CREATEPDF 93 Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
45 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_SECURITYOPTIONS 30 Opens the "Security options and warning" dialog.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_PRINTDOCS 6b Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
3e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MACROSEC 20 Opens the Macro Security dialog.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
3f uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT 1a Enter the master password.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MASTERPASSWORD 27 Opens the Enter Master Password dialog.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVEINFO d8 Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset button on File - Properties - General.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SAVESENDDOCS 7d Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC_WARNING 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE2 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_UNKNOWN_TAGS 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE3 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_CHARSET 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE1 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE4 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_NUMBERS_ENGLISH_US d6 If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_IGNORE_FONTNAMES 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_PRINT_EXTENSION 55 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE5 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_LOCAL_GRF dd Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_EXPORT 32 Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE6 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a4 These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_GRF 40 Specifies whether to display graphics and objects on the screen.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VSCROLL 20 Displays the vertical scrollbar.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HRULER 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_VMETRIC 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_ANY_RULER 59 Enables the rulers. Use the following two check boxes to select the ruler(s) to be shown.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HSCROLL 22 Displays the horizontal scrollbar.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_TBL 2f Displays the tables contained in your document.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_FIELD 4f Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_METRIC 26 Specifies the Unit for HTML documents.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_CROSS ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_POSTIT dc Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_SMOOTH_SCROLL 2d Activates the smooth page scrolling function.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER_RIGHT 30 Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_DRWFAST 3e Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_HMETRIC 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 8c To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document.
24 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_IDX 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
2f sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ACB_DOCONLY 3f Specifies that the settings apply to the current document only.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
f SW_HID_STD_FONT 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_INDEX_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
29 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
2b sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_CTRLFLD 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 190 If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
34 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PAPERFROMSETUP a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_REVERSE 72 Specifies whether to reverse the printing order. The last page of the document will then be the first one printed.
2c sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PROSPECT_RTL 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_SINGLEJOBS 62 Specifies that each new print job will begin on a new page even if you are using a duplex printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ALB_FAX 84 If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BLACK_FONT 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_RIGHTP 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_LEFTP 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2b sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_HIDDEN_TEXT 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
14 SW_HID_OPTPRINT_PAGE 38 Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document.
30 sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_TEXT_PLACEHOLDER 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PGRF 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PROSPECT 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2f sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PRINTEMPTYPAGES 190 If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
14 SW_HID_OPTTABLE_PAGE 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIX 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFMT_FORMATTING 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_VAR 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMALIGNMENT 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_HEADER 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_BORDER 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFORMATTING 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWMOVE 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIXPROP 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLINSERT 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWINSERT 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLMOVE 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_PARA 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLTAB 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLINDENT 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_CHAR_HIDDEN 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLSPACE 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN_PARA 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLMARGIN 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_ALLOW_IN_PROT 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
12 SW_HID_OPTSHDWCRSR 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_HSPACE af Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHYPH 166 Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_BREAK 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SPACE 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHDWCRSONOFF 1c Activates the direct cursor.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_TAB 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_MARKPOS 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_COL e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_LC_COL 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_ATTR ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_ATTR 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_COL e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
12 SW_HID_REDLINE_OPT 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_ATTR 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_COL e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_USE_SQUARE_PAGE_MODE 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
13 SW_HID_OPTLOAD_PAGE 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_USE_CHAR_UNIT 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_CHARTS be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ALB_METRIC 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3AMF_TAB 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE%3APB_DEFAULT 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
1c SW_HID_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 1d Špecifikuje znakový štýl.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_FORMAT 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AEDT_TEXT 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_LEVEL 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AED_SEPARATOR 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
15 SW_HID_OPTCAPTION_CLB 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_POS 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ACB_APPLYBORDER 37 Použije na rámček okolo popisu ohraničenie a tieň.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_CATEGORY 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_X 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
14 SVX_HID_OPTIONS_GRID cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_GRID_VISIBLE 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_Y 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_Y 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_USE_GRIDSNAP 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_X 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_OUTLINE 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_PAGEBREAKS 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_RFIND bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_OBJGRF 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_NIL 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ROWCOLHEADER 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_FORMULA 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_GRID db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANCHOR 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANNOT d1 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_CLIP f3 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_COLOR 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CONTENT 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_TBLREG 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_HSCROLL 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_SYNCZOOM 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DRAW 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VALUE db Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, and number cells in blue, no matter how their display is formatted.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VSCROLL 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DIAGRAM 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_GUIDELINE 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
2d sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3AMF_TAB 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_MARKHDR 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EDITMODE 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_TEXTFMT 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_REPLWARN 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_FORMAT 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_UNIT 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EXPREF f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_NEW 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
36 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_ENTRIES 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_COPY 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_COPYFROM 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_ADD 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ALB_LISTS 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 56 Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 50 Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_ITERATE b1 Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CALC 11b Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_MATCH 117 Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box is marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as MS Excel when searching cells in the database functions.
2d sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_PREC af Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_LOOKUP cc Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_REGEX 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESTD 1c Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CASE 64 Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESC10 62 Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
12 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CALC 32 Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATE1904 63 Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_GENERAL_PREC dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
2e sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_STEPS 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
24 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_EPS ad Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_REMOVE 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_MOVE 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
31 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_CONTENT 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_INSERT 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SKIPEMPTYPAGES 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SELECTEDSHEETS e3 Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
1b SC_HID_SCPAGE_COMPATIBILITY 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_FORMULA 35 Defines formula syntax options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
16 SC_HID_SCPAGE_DEFAULTS 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_RULER 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_MOVE_OUTLINE 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_VIEW 26 Specifies the available display modes.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HANDLES_BEZIER ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HELPLINES 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
1a SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_CONTENTS 26 Specifies the available display modes.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_BORDER 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_BIGORTHO 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
34 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_SNAP_AREA cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ROTATE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_POINTS 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_BEZ_ANGLE 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_FRAME 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_HELPLINES 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
2d svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ORTHO 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3a Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_COLOR 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_FRONT 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_GRAYSCALE 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
33 SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_HIDDEN_PAGES 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2f SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAGENAME 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
17 SD_HID_SD_PRINT_OPTIONS 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGETILE a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_DEFAULT 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BOOKLET 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_DATE 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGESIZE 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_TIME 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAPERBIN 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BLACKWHITE 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2b sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_BACK 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_QUICKEDIT 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_CROOK_NO_CONTORTION 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MASTERPAGE_CACHE 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
34 sd%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3AMTR_FLD_TABSTOP 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_TEMPLATE 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
31 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_PICKTHROUGH 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_ACTUAL_PAGE 4e Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MARKED_HIT_MOVES_ALWAYS a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_COPY 69 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key (Mac: Command key).
2a sd%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_SCALE 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
2a sd%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ALB_METRIC 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_MISC 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
3d starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_IGNORE_SPACING 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
16 SFX2_HID_PRINT_OPTIONS 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
36 starmath%3AMetricField%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3AMF_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_TITLEROW 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
28 starmath%3ATabPage%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
36 starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
3f starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ORIGINAL_SIZE 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
3c starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_EQUATION_TEXT 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2e STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_FRAME 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3d starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_FIT_TO_PAGE 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3ALB_CHART_COLOR_LIST 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3APB_RESET_TO_DEFAULT 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
3a svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_EXECTBL bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
1b CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_MSFLTR2_CLB ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
32 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_COMPLEX_LANG 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_LOCALESETTING 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_DECIMALSEPARATOR 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
2f cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_WEST_LANG 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_USERINTERFACE c3 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CURRENT_DOC 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3AED_DATEPATTERNS cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_ASIAN_LANG 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_ASIANSUPPORT 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CTLSUPPORT 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_CURRENCY 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_NO_COMP 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_PUNCT 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ACB_STANDARD 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_KANA_COMP 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_START 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_COMP 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_KERNING 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_END 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_WHITESPACES 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_MIDDLE_DOT 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_IAIYA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_TSITHICHI_DHIZI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_DIZI_DUZU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
45 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HYUFYU_BYUVYU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_VARIANT_FORM_KANJI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_PUNCTUATION 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
4b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_PROLONGED_SOUNDMARK 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
46 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_OLD_KANA_FORMS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HIRAGANA_KATAKANA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_KIKU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_BAVA_HAFA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CONTRACTIONS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_SESHE_ZEJE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_REPEAT_CHAR_MARKS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_MINUS_DASH_CHOON 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ACB_SEQUENCECHECKING 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_VISUAL 9d Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_LOGICAL b2 Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ALB_NUMERALS ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_DRIVERPOOLING 73 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_POOL_CONNS 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ANF_TIMEOUT 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_EDIT 3a Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_DELETE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_NEW 35 Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 3b Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 52 Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_PARAMETER 27 Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_ADD 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_CLASSPATH 1c Opens the Class Path dialog.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_LIST b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3ACB_JAVA_ENABLE 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDPATH 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3ALB_PATH 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_REMOVE_PATH 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDARCHIVE 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_REMOVE 29 Deletes the selected JRE start parameter.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_ASSIGN 31 Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3AED_PARAMETER 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3ALB_ASSIGNED 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
3a xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_LOW c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
3d xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_MEDIUM e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
3f xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_VERYHIGH 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
3b xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_HIGH bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_REMOVE_TRUSTCERT 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
48 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_VIEW_TRUSTCERT 3f Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate.
4d xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_REMOVE_TRUSTFILELOC 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
43 xmlsecurity%3AListBox%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3ALB_TRUSTFILELOC 5f Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_ADD_TRUSTFILELOC 5e Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
28 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_TRUSTSOURCES 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ANF_PORT 14 Enter the SMTP port.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_AUTHENTICATION 72 Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ACB_REPLYTO 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
23 SW_CHECKBOX_TP_MAILCONFIG_CB_SECURE 39 When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_TEST 44 Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_ADDRESS 26 Enter your e-mail address for replies.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_DISPLAYNAME 10 Enter your name.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_SERVER 1b Enter the SMTP server name.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_REPLYTO 2c Enter the address to use for e-mail replies.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYMONTH 27 A check will be performed once a month.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTOCHECK 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHECKNOW 1e A check will be performed now.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYDAY 25 A check will be performed once a day.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYWEEK 43 A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting.
33 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_SERVER 38 Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server.
46 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SEP_AUTHENTICATION 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_IMAP 32 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP.
39 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ANF_PORT 2a Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server.
3f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ACB_AUTHENTICATION 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
35 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_USERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the SMTP server.
38 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_OUTPASSWORD 25 Enter the password for the user name.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_POP3 33 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INUSERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the IMAP server.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INPASSWORD 13 Enter the password.
40 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SMPTAFTERPOP 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
3a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3AED_ERROR 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
21 SW_HID_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS_TLB 41 In the top list box you will see the results of the test session.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3APB_STOP 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 61 The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_ROW 2a Vloží nový riadok pod aktuálny riadok.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_COL 2d Zamení aktuálny stĺpec so stĺpcom vpravo.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_TEXT_COL 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_COL 5e Deletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 20 Zadajte názvy dátových radov.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 46 Otvorí dialóg Tabuľka dát, v ktorom môžete upraviť dáta grafu.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_ROW 2c Zamení aktuálny riadok s riadkom pod ním.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_ROW 48 Odstráni aktuálny riadok. Riadok hlavičky nie je možné odstrániť.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_COL 33 Inserts a new data series after the current column.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle 60 Kliknutím na ikonu Názvy osí zap/vyp na paneli Formát zobrazíte alebo skryjete názvy osí.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle 62 Kliknutím na ikonu Titulky zap/vyp na paneli Formát zobrazíte alebo skryjete nadpis a podtitul.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 38 Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 21 Umiestni legendu vľavo od grafu.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 89 Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 1a Umiestni legendu nad graf.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_LEGEND_POS%3ALB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend 60 Pre zobrazenie alebo skrytie legendy, kliknite na ikonu Legenda zap/vyp na paneli Formátovanie.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 1a Umiestni legendu pod graf.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 21 Umiestni legendu vpravo od grafu.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PLACEMENT 35 Vyberie relatívne umiestnenie popisov dát v objekte
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PERCENT 42 Zobrazí percentuálne hodnoty dátových bodov v každom stĺpci.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_KNOB 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_NUMBER 2d Zobrazí absolútne hodnoty dátových bodov.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_VALUE 2d Zobrazí absolútne hodnoty dátových bodov.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_EDIT 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SYMBOL 41 Zobrazí vedľa každého popisu dátového bodu ikonu z legendy.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Otvorí dialóg pre výber formátu čísla
1c CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Otvorí dialóg pre výber formátu percent
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 47 Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_TEXT 21 Zobrazí popisy dátových bodov.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SEPARATOR 52 Vyberie oddeľovač medzi viacnásobnými textovými reťazcami v rovnakom objekte
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XAXIS 2b Zobrazí os X s pododdielovým rozdelením.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YAXIS 2b Zobrazí os Y s pododdielovým rozdelením.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZAXIS 2b Zobrazí os Z s pododdielovým rozdelením.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XAXIS 22 Zobrazí v grafe sekundárnu os X.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YAXIS 22 Zobrazí v grafe sekundárnu os Y.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION 2f Vyberte funkciu pre výpočet chybových čiar.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SIGMA 53 Štandardná odchýlka: Zobrazí štandardnú odchýlku (druhá mocnina odchýlky).
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CT_INDICATE 21 Špecifikuje chybový indikátor.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_VALUE 54 Vložte hodnotu na odčítanie od zobrazenej hodnoty ako zápornú chybovú hodnotu.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_VARIANT 5f Odchýlka: Zobrazí odchýlku vypočítanú z počtu dátových bodov a príslušných hodnôt.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT 75 Zobrazí percentá. Toto zobrazenie odkazuje na zodpovedajúci dátový bod. Nastavte percentá v oblasti Parametrov.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_NEGATIVE 26 Ukáže iba záporné chybové čiary.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_CONSTERROR 49 Zobrazí konštantné hodnoty, ktoré špecifikujete v oblasti Parametre.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_BOTH 2c Ukáže kladné a záporné chybové čiary.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PLUS_VALUE 49 Zobrazí konštantné hodnoty, ktoré špecifikujete v oblasti Parametre.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_POSITIVE 24 Ukáže iba kladné chybové čiary.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE 85 Vložte adresu oblasti, z ktorej sa má získať záporná chybová hodnota. Použite tlačidlo Zmenšiť pre výber oblasti v liste.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_RANGE 88 Kliknite na oblasť buniek a potom špecifikujte oblasť buniek, z ktorej chcete definovať kladné a záporné hodnoty chybovej čiary.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER ac Kliknite na tlačidlo zmenšiť dialóg, potom použite myš pre výber oblasti buniek v zošite. Pre obnovenie dialógu do pôvodnej veľkosti kliknite znovu na tlačidlo.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE 82 Vložte adresu oblasti, z ktorej sa má získať kladná chybová hodnota. Použite tlačidlo Zmenšiť pre výber oblasti v liste
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_VALUE 54 Vložte hodnotu na pripočítanie k zobrazenej hodnote ako kladnú chybovú hodnotu.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR_VALUE 87 Hranica chyby: Zobrazí hranicu chyby v percentách podľa najvyššej hodnoty v skupine dát. Nastavte percentá v oblasti Parametrov.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NO_ERROR 24 Nezobrazuje žiadne chybové čiary.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT_VALUE 75 Zobrazí percentá. Toto zobrazenie odkazuje na zodpovedajúci dátový bod. Nastavte percentá v oblasti Parametrov.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SAME_FOR_BOTH c4 Povolí použiť kladnú chybovú hodnotu ako aj zápornú chybovú hodnotu. Meniť môžete iba hodnoty "Kladného(+)" poľa. Tieto hodnoty sa automaticky prekopírujú do "Záporného(-)" poľa.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION_LB 2f Vyberte funkciu pre výpočet chybových čiar.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER ac Kliknite na tlačidlo zmenšiť dialóg, potom použite myš pre výber oblasti buniek v zošite. Pre obnovenie dialógu do pôvodnej veľkosti kliknite znovu na tlačidlo.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR 87 Hranica chyby: Zobrazí hranicu chyby v percentách podľa najvyššej hodnoty v skupine dát. Nastavte percentá v oblasti Parametrov.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_MINUS_VALUE 49 Zobrazí konštantné hodnoty, ktoré špecifikujete v oblasti Parametre.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 40 Use the Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation a3 Pre zobrazenie rovnice krivky trendu vyberte krivku trendu v grafe, kliknite na ňu pravým tlačidlom a z lokálnej ponuky vyberte Vložiť Rovnicu Krivky Trendu.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LOGARITHMIC 35 Je zobrazený logaritmický priebeh trendovej krivky.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_NONE 2b Žiadna trendová krivka nie je zobrazená.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LINEAR 29 Je zobrazená lineárna trendová krivka.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_EQUATION 39 Ukazuje rovnicu trendovej krivky vedľa regresnej krivky.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_R_SQUARED 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_POWER 32 Je zobrazený mocninový priebeh trendovej krivky.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_EXPONENTIAL 36 Je zobrazený exponenciálny priebeh trendovej krivky.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 8c Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series.
31 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_2 7f Zmení mierku osi Y. Táto os je viditeľná len ak je k nej priradený aspoň jeden dátový rad a je zapnuté jej zobrazenie.
2a chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_GAP 33 Určuje vzdialenosť medzi stĺpcami v percentách.
2e chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_OVERLAP 3e Určuje nevyhnutné nastavenia pre presahujúce dátové rady.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STARTING_ANGLE_DIAL 165 Presuňte malú bodku na kruhu alebo kliknite na ľubovoľnom mieste na kruh pre nastavenie počiatočného uhlu koláčového nebo prstencového grafu. Počiatočný uhol je matematická poloha uhlu, kde bude vykreslená prvá časť grafu. Hodnota 90 stupňov vykreslí prvú časť na pozícii 12 hodín. Hodnota 0 stupňov začína na pozícii 3 hodiny.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 5d Stĺpce z rôznych dátových radov sa zobrazujú, ako keby boli pripojené len k jednej osi.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
32 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ACB_CLOCKWISE c9 Východzí smer v ktorom sú kúsky koláčového grafu usporiadané, je proti smeru hodinových ručičiek. Zaškrtnite možnosť v smere hodinových ručičiek pre vykreslenie grafu v opačnom smere.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_CONNECTOR 8b For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_1 5b Táto možnosť je implicitne zapnutá. Všetky riadky dát sú zarovnané k hlavnej osi Y.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
3b chart2%3ANumericField%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ANF_STARTING_ANGLE 74 Vložte počiatočný uhol medzi 0 a 359 stupňami. Pre zmenu hodnôt veľkosti môžete tiež kliknúť na šípky.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_ZGRID 38 Pridá mriežku, ktorá rozdelí os Z na menšie časti.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal cd Ikona Vodorovná mriežka zap/vyp na paneli Formátovanie prepína zobrazenie mriežky pre os X. Poznámka: Funguje iba pokiaľ nie sú zaškrtnuté polia Vedľajšie mriežky v ponuke Vložiť - Mriežky.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical d2 Ikona Zvislá mriežka zap/vyp na paneli Formátovanie prepína zobrazenie mriežky pre os Y. Poznámka: Funguje iba pokiaľ nie je zaškrtnuté políčko Vedľajšie mriežky osi X v ponuke Vložiť -Mriežky.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YGRID 38 Pridá mriežku, ktorá rozdelí os Y na menšie časti.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XGRID 38 Pridá mriežku, ktorá rozdelí os X na menšie časti.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryYTitle 26 Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu.
d .uno%3AZTitle 26 Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu.
d .uno%3AXTitle 26 Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryXTitle 26 Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu.
f .uno%3ASubTitle 26 Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu.
10 .uno%3AMainTitle 26 Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu.
d .uno%3AYTitle 4b Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu alebo vlastnosti všetkých nadpisov.
10 .uno%3AAllTitles 4b Upraví vlastnosti vybraného nadpisu alebo vlastnosti všetkých nadpisov.
25 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_EQUATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_TITLE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTOVERLAP 43 Určuje, že text v bunkách môže pretiecť do ďalších buniek.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTBREAK 18 Povolí zalomenie textu.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_DOWNUP 45 Rozloží čísla na osi, nepárne čísla budú nižšie ako párne.
3e chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_AUTOORDER 26 Automaticky rozmiestni čísla na osi.
32 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ALB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_STACKED 2b Text v bunkách sa bude zobrazovať zvislo.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 6b Ikona Zobraziť/Skryť nadpisy osí na paneli Formátovanie zapína alebo vypína zobrazenie nadpisov osí.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_UPDOWN 45 Rozloží čísla na osi, párne čísla budú nižšie ako nepárne.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_DEGREES 28 Môžete ručne zadať uhol orientácie.
2c CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_LABEL_LB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_SCHOW_DESCR 38 Určuje,či sa majú zobraziť alebo skryť názvy osí.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 3b Kliknutím kdekoľvek na koleso určíte orientáciu textu.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_SIDEBYSIDE 24 Umiestni čísla na osi vedľa seba.
d .uno%3ALegend 34 Určuje okraje, výplň a vlastnosti znakov legendy.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB 96 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete upraviť vlastnosti sekundárnej osi Y. Pre vloženie sekundárnej osi Y vyberte Vložiť - Osi a zaškrtnite Os Y.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA 96 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete upraviť vlastnosti sekundárnej osi X. Pre vloženie sekundárnej osi X vyberte Vložiť - Osi a zaškrtnite Os X.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 44 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete upraviť vlastnosti zvolenej osi.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 44 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete upraviť vlastnosti zvolenej osi.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 44 Otvorí dialóg, v ktorom môžete upraviť vlastnosti zvolenej osi.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 42 Otvorí dialóg Os Y, v ktorom môžete upraviť vlastnosti osi Y.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE_MayBeDateAxis 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3AValueAxis 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
24 CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_SCALE_EDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2d chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3ACategory 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
37 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_TIME_RESOLUTION 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2d chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 4d Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_HELP 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2a chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_MAIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
30 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_TIME_RESOLUTION 47 Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MAX 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2c chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
28 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_SCALE_CBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
33 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
2a chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_INNER 3a Určuje, že sa značky zobrazia na vnútornej strane osi.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_INNER 3a Určuje, že sa značky zobrazia na vnútornej strane osi.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_INNER 52 Určuje, že sa značky vedľajšieho intervalu zobrazia na vnútornej strane osi.
35 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_OUTER 3a Určuje, že sa značky zobrazia na vonkajšej strane osi.
39 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_OUTER 3a Určuje, že sa značky zobrazia na vonkajšej strane osi.
42 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
36 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
2f CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
30 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
3c CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 CHART2_COMBOBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
4a chart2%3AComboBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_INNER 52 Určuje, že sa značky vedľajšieho intervalu zobrazia na vnútornej strane osi.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_OUTER 52 Určuje, že sa značky vedľajšieho intervalu zobrazia na vonkajšej strane osi.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_OUTER 52 Určuje, že sa značky vedľajšieho intervalu zobrazia na vonkajšej strane osi.
3f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYHelp 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZHelp 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYMain 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXHelp 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXMain 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZMain 43 Otvorí dialóg Mriežka, kde môžete určiť vlastnosti mriežky.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall 88 Otvorí dialóg Stena grafu, kde môžete upraviť vlastnosti steny grafu. Stena grafu je "zvislé" pozadie za dátovou oblasťou grafu.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor a7 Otvorí dialóg Päta grafu, kde môžete upraviť vlastnosti päty grafu. Päta grafu je dolná oblasť v 3D grafoch. Táto funkcia je k dispozícii len pre 3D grafy.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea 81 Otvorí dialóg Plocha grafu, kde môžete upraviť vlastnosti plochy grafu. Plocha grafu je pozadie za všetkými prvkami grafu.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_B 17 Apply a B-spline model.
3e chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_ORDER 22 Set the degree of the polynomials.
43 chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_RESOLUTION 17 Nastaviť rozlíšenie.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_CUBIC 1b Apply a cubic spline model.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 4f Nastavuje rotáciu grafu na osi y. Náhľad sa mení podľa nových nastavení.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
3a chart2%3ACheckbox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_ROUNDEDEDGE 17 Okraje sa o 5% zaoblia.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 4f Nastavuje rotáciu grafu na osi x. Náhľad sa mení podľa nových nastavení.
42 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 30 Vyberte farbu pomocou dialógu pre výber farby.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 4c Kliknutím zapnete alebo vypnete odrazový svetelný zdroj so zvýraznením.
3a chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_OBJECTLINES 45 Nastavením štýlu čiary na plný sa zobrazia okraje okolo oblasti.
40 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE d6 Zaškrtnite pole Perspektíva pre zobrazenie grafu ako cez objektív kamery. V rolovacom poli nastavte percentá. Pri vyššom percentuálnom nastavení vyzerajú bližšie objekty väčšie ako tie vzdialenejšie.
3c chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 24 Vyberte farbu okolitého osvetlenia.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_SHADING 62 Pokiaľ je zaškrtnuté, použije sa Gouraudovo tieňovanie, inak sa použije ploché tieňovanie.
d .uno%3AView3D 9f Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 4f Nastavuje rotáciu grafu na osi z. Náhľad sa mení podľa nových nastavení.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 38 Kliknutím vypnete alebo zapnete jednotný zdroj svetla.
39 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_PERSPECTIVE d6 Zaškrtnite pole Perspektíva pre zobrazenie grafu ako cez objektív kamery. V rolovacom poli nastavte percentá. Pri vyššom percentuálnom nastavení vyzerajú bližšie objekty väčšie ako tie vzdialenejšie.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ALB_SCHEME 4b Vyberte schému zo zoznamu alebo kliknite na zaškrtávacie polia nižšie.
3f chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES fb Pokiaľ sú zapnuté Pravouhlé osi, môžete rotovať obsah grafu len v smere osí X a Y, tj. paralelne s okrajmi grafu. Pre novo vytvorené 3D grafy sú pravouhlé osi implicitne zapnuté. Koláčové a Prstencové grafy nepodporujú pravouhlé osi.
46 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 30 Vyberte farbu pomocou dialógu pre výber farby.
3b chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_LIGHTSOURCE 28 Vyberte farbu pre vybraný zdroj svetla.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_SHOW 19 Zobrazí legendu v grafe.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 1f Umiestni legendu hore nad graf.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_Y 69 Vloží popis pre druhú os y. Táto možnosť je dostupná iba pre grafy, ktoré podporujú druhú os y.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZGRID 75 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Z 4b Zadajte popis osi z. Táto voľba je dostupná len pre trojrozmerné grafy.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 25 Umiestni legendu vľavo vedľa grafu.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 1f Umiestni legendu dole pod graf.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_X 69 Vloží popis pre druhú os x. Táto možnosť je dostupná iba pre grafy, ktoré podporujú druhú os x.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Y 1e Zadajte popis osi y (zvislá).
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 26 Umiestni legendu doprava vedľa grafu.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_X 21 Zadajte popis osi x (vodorovná).
19 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_MAIN 15 Zadajte nadpis grafu.
18 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SUB 18 Zadajte podnadpis grafu.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 1a Otvorí dialóg Typ grafu.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 33 Po kliknutí prejdete na danú stránku sprievodcu.
2e chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_3D_SCHEME 1a Zvoľte typ 3D zobrazenia.
38 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y_PERCENT 30 Skladané rady zobrazujú hodnoty ako percentá.
34 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_XVALUE_SORTING 67 V XY bodovom grafe spojí body podľa vzostupných hodnôt X, aj keď je poradie hodnôt pôvodne iné.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_SPLINES 1f Čiary sa vykreslia ako krivky.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_NUM_OF_LINES 3d Určenie počtu čiar pre typy grafov Stĺpcový a Čiarový.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_TYPE 1d Zvoľte základný typ grafu.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LB_BAR_GEOMETRY 18 Vyberte tvar zo zoznamu.
30 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y 2c Zložené rady zobrazujú hodnoty nad sebou.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_STACKED 2d Zobrazuje zložené rady pre Čiarové grafy.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_VARIANT 29 Zvoľte variantu základného typu grafu.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_3D_LOOK 21 Zapne 3D vzhľad hodnôt údajov.
35 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3APB_SPLINE_DIALOG 32 Otvorí dialóg pre nastavenie vlastností krivky.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATACOLS f3 Dátové rady získavajú údaje z po sebe idúcich stĺpcov v určenom rozsahu. Pre bodové grafy obsahuje prvý dátový stĺpec hodnoty x pre všetky rady. Všetky ostatné dátové stĺpce sa použijú ako hodnoty y, jeden pre každý rad.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AED_RANGE a8 Zadajte rozsah dát, ktorý chcete použiť v grafe. V Calc kliknite na ikonu Vybrať rozsah dát, ak chcete minimalizovať tento dialóg pokiaľ vyberáte rozsah dát.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATAROWS f5 Dátové rady získavajú údaje z po sebe idúcich riadkov v určenom rozsahu. Pre bodové grafy obsahuje prvá dátová rada hodnoty x pre všetky dátové rady. Všetky ostatné dátové rady sa použijú ako hodnoty y, jedna pre každý rad.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 122 Pre dátové rady v stĺpcoch: Prvý riadok v rozsahu sa použije pre názvy dátových radov. Pre dátové rady v riadkoch: Prvý riadok rozsahu sa použije ako kategória. Ďalšie riadky predstavujú dátové rady. Pokiaľ nie je toto pole zaškrtnuté, všetky riadky sú dátové rady.
3e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 12e Pre dátové rady v stĺpcoch: Prvý stĺpec v rozsahu sa použije pre názvy dátových radov. Pre dátové rady v riadkoch: Prvý stĺpec v rozsahu sa použije ako kategória. Ďalšie stĺpce predstavujú dátové stĺpce. Pokiaľ nie je toto pole zaškrtnuté, všetky stĺpce sú dátové stĺpce.
31 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AIB_RANGE a8 Zadajte rozsah dát, ktorý chcete použiť v grafe. V Calc kliknite na ikonu Vybrať rozsah dát, ak chcete minimalizovať tento dialóg pokiaľ vyberáte rozsah dát.
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 50 Otvorí dialóg Rozsahy dát, kde môžete upraviť Rozsah dát a Dátové rady.
35 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_CAT 14e Zobrazuje zdrojový rozsah pre kategórie (texty, ktoré sa zobrazia na osi X). Pre graf XY toto textové pole obsahuje zdrojový rozsah pre popisky dát, ktoré sa zobrazujú pri dátových bodoch. V Calc kliknite na tlačidlo Vybrať rozsah dát, ak chcete minimalizovať tento dialóg pokiaľ budete označovať rozsah dát myšou.
2f chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_CATEGORIES 14e Zobrazuje zdrojový rozsah pre kategórie (texty, ktoré sa zobrazia na osi X). Pre graf XY toto textové pole obsahuje zdrojový rozsah pre popisky dát, ktoré sa zobrazujú pri dátových bodoch. V Calc kliknite na tlačidlo Vybrať rozsah dát, ak chcete minimalizovať tento dialóg pokiaľ budete označovať rozsah dát myšou.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_RANGE 11c Zobrazuje zdrojový rozsah dát z druhého stĺpca zoznamu Rozsah dát. Rozsah môžete upraviť v textovom poli alebo označiť myšou v dokumente. V Calc kliknite na tlačidlo Vybrať rozsah dát, ak chcete minimalizovať tento dialóg pokiaľ budete označovať rozsah dát myšou.
2e chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_ADD 91 Pridá nový záznam pod aktuálny záznam v zozname Dátové rady. Pokiaľ je vybraný nejaký záznam, nový dátový rad bude rovnakého typu.
2f chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_DOWN 3f Posunie označený záznam v zozname Dátových radov nižšie.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_RANGES_LIST b9 Zobrazí všetky rozsahy dát používané dátovými radmi, ktoré sú vybrané v zozname Dátových radov. Pre každý rozsah dát sa zobrazuje názov oblasti a zdrojový rozsah dát.
31 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_REMOVE 39 Odstráni označený záznam zo zoznamu Dátových radov.
36 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_MAIN 11c Zobrazuje zdrojový rozsah dát z druhého stĺpca zoznamu Rozsah dát. Rozsah môžete upraviť v textovom poli alebo označiť myšou v dokumente. V Calc kliknite na tlačidlo Vybrať rozsah dát, ak chcete minimalizovať tento dialóg pokiaľ budete označovať rozsah dát myšou.
2d chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_UP 3f Posunie označený záznam v zozname Dátových radov vyššie.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_SERIES_LIST c0 Zobrazuje zoznam všetkých dátových radov grafu. Po kliknutí na záznam sa tento zobrazí a môžete ho upraviť. Kliknutím na Pridať vložíte nové rady do zoznamu za vybraný záznam.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 1f Zmení usporiadanie dát grafu.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 1f Zmení usporiadanie dát grafu.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 3b Zmení mierku textu v grafe, keď zmeníte veľkosť grafu.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement 93 Presunie všetky objekty grafu na ich začiatočnú pozíciu. Táto funkcia nemení typ grafu ani žiadny iný atribút okrem umiestnenia objektov.
12 .uno%3AContextType 28 Zobrazuje názov typu aktuálneho grafu.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 47 Vráti formát všetkých dátových bodov do predvoleného nastavenia.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 16 Odstráni vybranú os.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 19 Formátuje dátové rady.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 24 Formátuje rozptyl hodnôt na osi Y.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 17 Formátuje vybranú os.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1b Formátuje vybraný nadpis.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 1d Vloží vedľajšiu mriežku.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 25 Formátuje rovnicu trendovej priamky.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 11a Vytvorí graf v aktuálnom dokumente. Spojitú oblasť buniek použijete ako zdroj dát pre graf tak, že kliknete dovnútra oblasti buniek a použijete tento príkaz. Prípadne môžete označiť len vybrané bunky a použiť tento príkaz na vytvorenie grafu len z týchto buniek.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 22 Otvorí dialóg pre vloženie osi.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 17 Formátuje pätu grafu.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 27 Formátuje indikátory akciovej straty.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 11a Vytvorí graf v aktuálnom dokumente. Spojitú oblasť buniek použijete ako zdroj dát pre graf tak, že kliknete dovnútra oblasti buniek a použijete tento príkaz. Prípadne môžete označiť len vybrané bunky a použiť tento príkaz na vytvorenie grafu len z týchto buniek.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 11a Vytvorí graf v aktuálnom dokumente. Spojitú oblasť buniek použijete ako zdroj dát pre graf tak, že kliknete dovnútra oblasti buniek a použijete tento príkaz. Prípadne môžete označiť len vybrané bunky a použiť tento príkaz na vytvorenie grafu len z týchto buniek.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 19 Formátuje líniu trendu.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 23 Formátuje líniu strednej hodnoty.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 25 Vloží koeficient determinácie R².
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 18 Formátuje dátový bod.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 20 Formátuje vedľajšiu mriežku.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 49 Vráti formát vybraného dátového bodu do východiskového nastavenia.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 22 Odstráni líniu strednej hodnoty.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 1b Odstráni hlavnú mriežku.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 19 Formátuje legendu grafu.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 1f Odstráni vedľajšiu mriežku.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 2a Otvorí dialóg pre vloženie nadpisu osi.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 19 Formátuje oblasť grafu.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 11a Vytvorí graf v aktuálnom dokumente. Spojitú oblasť buniek použijete ako zdroj dát pre graf tak, že kliknete dovnútra oblasti buniek a použijete tento príkaz. Prípadne môžete označiť len vybrané bunky a použiť tento príkaz na vytvorenie grafu len z týchto buniek.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 19 Vloží hlavnú mriežku.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 35 Otvorí dialóg pre vloženie alebo odstránenie ôs.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 1e Odstráni všetky popisy dát.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 18 Odstráni legendu grafu.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 14 Vloží popisy dát.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 2d Otvorí dialóg pre vloženie nadpisov grafu.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 17 Formátuje stenu grafu.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 28 Formátuje indikátory akciového zisku.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 1f Formátuje vybraný popis dát.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 1e Odstráni vybraný popis dát.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 23 Odstráni rovnicu trendovej línie.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 16 Odstráni hodnotu R².
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 17 Formátuje popisy dát.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 20 Odstráni chybové čiary osi Y.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 19 Vloží jeden popis dát.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 3d Vloží rovnicu línie trendu a koeficient determinácie R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 1c Formátuje hlavnú mriežku.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector b3 Vyberte prvok grafu, ktorý chcete formátovať. Vybraný prvok sa zvýrazní v náhľade grafu. Kliknutím na Formátovať výber sa otvorí dialóg vlastností vybraného prvku.
